You are on page 1of 340

SEN06257-00

HYDRAULIC PC300 -8M0


EXCAVATOR
PC300LC -8M0
PC350 -8M0
PC350LC -8M0
PC300- 80001
PC300LC- 80001
SERIAL NUMBERS and up
PC350- 80001
PC350LC- 80001
SEN06259-00

HYDRAULIC EXCAVATOR 1SHOP MANUAL

PC300-8M0
PC300LC-8M0
PC350-8M0
PC350LC-8M0

Machine model Serial number


PC300-8M0 80001 and up
PC300LC-8M0 80001 and up
PC350-8M0 80001 and up
PC350LC-8M0 80001 and up

00 Index and foreword 1


100 Index
Composition of shop manual .......................................................................................................................... 2
Table of contents ............................................................................................................................................. 3

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 00-100 1


100 Index
SEN06259-00 Composition of shop manual

Composition of shop manual 1


The contents of this shop manual are shown together with Form No. in a list.
Note 1: Always keep the latest version of this manual in accordance with this list and utilize accordingly.
The marks shown to the right of Form No. denote the following:
Q: New issue (to be filed additionally) q: Revision (to be replaced for each Form No.)
Note 2: This shop manual can be supplied for each Form No.
Note 3: To file this shop manual in the special binder for management, handle it as follows:
• Place a divider on the top of each section in the file after matching the Tub No. with No. indicated
next to each Section Name shown in the table below:
• File overview and other materials in sections in the order shown below and utilize them accord-
ingly.

Section Title Form Number

Shop Manual, contents binder, binder label and tabs SEN06257-00

00 Index and foreword SEN06258-00


100 Index SEN06259-00
200 Foreword and general information SEN06260-00

01 Specification SEN06261-00
100 Specification and technical data SEN06262-00

10 Structure, function and maintenance standard SEN06263-00


100 Engine and cooling system SEN06264-00
200 Power train SEN06265-00
300 Undercarriage and frame SEN06266-00
401 Hydraulic system, Part 1 SEN06267-00
402 Hydraulic system, Part 2 SEN06268-00
403 Hydraulic system, Part 3 SEN06269-00
500 Work equipment SEN06270-00
600 Electrical system SEN06271-00

90 Diagrams and drawings SEN06272-00


100 Hydraulic diagrams and drawings SEN06273-00
200 Electrical diagrams and drawings SEN06274-00

00-100 2 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


100 Index
Table of contents SEN06259-00

Table of contents 1
00 Index and foreword
100 Index SEN06259-00
Composition of shop manual ................................................................................................... 2
Table of contents ..................................................................................................................... 3
200 Foreword and general information SEN06260-00
Foreword, safety and general information .................................................................................... 2
How to read the shop manual....................................................................................................... 9
Explanation of terms for maintenance standard ......................................................................... 11
Handling equipment of fuel system devices ............................................................................... 13
Handling of intake system parts.................................................................................................. 14
Handling of hydraulic equipment ................................................................................................ 15
Method of disconnecting and connectingof push-pull type coupler ............................................17
Handling of electrical equipment ................................................................................................20
How to read electric wire code ...................................................................................................29
Precautions when performing operation..................................................................................... 32
Practical use of KOMTRAX ........................................................................................................ 35
Standard tightening torque table................................................................................................. 36
List of abbreviation ..................................................................................................................... 40
Conversion table......................................................................................................................... 45
01 Specification
100 Specification and technical data SEN06262-00
Specification dimension drawings................................................................................................. 2
Specifications................................................................................................................................ 4
Weight table................................................................................................................................10
Table of fuel, coolant and lubricants ........................................................................................... 12

10 Structure, function and maintenance standard


100 Engine and cooling system SEN06264-00
Engine related parts...................................................................................................................... 2
Radiator, oil cooler and aftercooler ............................................................................................... 3
200 Power train SEN06265-00
Power train ................................................................................................................................... 2
Swing circle .................................................................................................................................. 3
Swing machinery .......................................................................................................................... 4
Final drive ..................................................................................................................................... 6
Sprocket........................................................................................................................................ 8
300 Undercarriage and frame SEN06266-00
Track frame and recoil spring ....................................................................................................... 2
Idler............................................................................................................................................... 4
Carrier roller.................................................................................................................................. 6
Track roller.................................................................................................................................... 7
Track shoe .................................................................................................................................... 9
401 Hydraulic system, Part 1 SEN06267-00
Hydraulic equipment layout drawing............................................................................................. 2
Hydraulic tank and filter ................................................................................................................ 4
Hydraulic pump............................................................................................................................. 6
402 Hydraulic system, Part 2 SEN06268-00
Control valve................................................................................................................................. 2
CLSS .......................................................................................................................................... 14
Functions and operation by valve............................................................................................... 18
Merge-divider valve .................................................................................................................... 33
Attachment circuit selector valve ................................................................................................57
Hydraulic drift prevention valve .................................................................................................. 60

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 00-100 3


100 Index
SEN06259-00 Table of contents

403 Hydraulic system, Part 3 SEN06269-00


Valve control .................................................................................................................................2
PPC valve .....................................................................................................................................4
Solenoid valve ............................................................................................................................24
PPC accumulator........................................................................................................................26
Return oil filter.............................................................................................................................27
Center swivel joint.......................................................................................................................28
Travel motor................................................................................................................................29
Swing motor................................................................................................................................41
Work equipment cylinder ............................................................................................................50
500 Work equipment SEN06270-00
Work equipment............................................................................................................................2
Dimensions of components ..........................................................................................................4
600 Electrical system SEN06271-00
Engine control system ..................................................................................................................2
Electronic control system............................................................................................................ 11
Machine monitor system.............................................................................................................36
Sensor ........................................................................................................................................56
KOMTRAX system......................................................................................................................59

90 Diagrams and drawings


100 Hydraulic diagrams and drawings SEN06273-00
Symbols in hydraulic circuit diagram ................................................................................................2
Hydraulic circuit diagram ..................................................................................................................5
200 Electrical diagrams and drawings SEN06274-00
Symbols in electric circuit diagram ...................................................................................................2
Electrical circuit diagram ..................................................................................................................5

00-100 4 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


100 Index
Table of contents SEN06259-00

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 00-100 5


SEN06259-00

PC300-8M0, PC300LC-8M0, PC350-8M0, PC350LC-8M0 HYDRAULIC EXCAVATOR


Form No. SEN06259-00

© 2013 KOMATSU
All Rights Reserved
Printed in Japan 01-13 (01)

00-100 6
SEN06260-00

HYDRAULIC EXCAVATOR 1SHOP MANUAL

PC300-8M0
PC300LC-8M0
PC350-8M0
PC350LC-8M0

Machine model Serial number


PC300-8M0 80001 and up
PC300LC-8M0 80001 and up
PC350-8M0 80001 and up
PC350LC-8M0 80001 and up

00 Index and foreword 1


200 Foreword and general information
Foreword, safety and general information ...................................................................................................... 2
How to read the shop manual ......................................................................................................................... 9
Explanation of terms for maintenance standard ............................................................................................11
Handling equipment of fuel system devices.................................................................................................. 13
Handling of intake system parts .................................................................................................................... 14
Handling of hydraulic equipment................................................................................................................... 15
Method of disconnecting and connectingof push-pull type coupler .............................................................. 17
Handling of electrical equipment................................................................................................................... 20
How to read electric wire code...................................................................................................................... 29
Precautions when performing operation ....................................................................................................... 32
Practical use of KOMTRAX........................................................................................................................... 35
Standard tightening torque table ................................................................................................................... 36
List of abbreviation........................................................................................................................................ 40
Conversion table ........................................................................................................................................... 45

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 00-200 1


200 Foreword and general information
SEN06260-00 Foreword, safety and general information

Foreword, safety and general information 1


Important safety notice
q Appropriate servicing and repair are extremely important to ensure safe operation of the machine. The
shop manual describes the effective and safe servicing and repair methods recommended by Komatsu.
Some of these methods require the use of the special tools designed by Komatsu for the specific pur-
pose.
q The symbol mark k is used for such matters that require special cautions during the work. The work
indicated by the caution mark should be performed according to the instructions with special attention to
the cautions. Should hazardous situation occur or be anticipated during such work, be sure to keep safe
first and take every necessary measure.

General precautions q If welding repairs is required, always have a


k Inappropriate handling causes an extreme trained and experienced welder with good
danger. Read and understand what is knowledge of welding perform the work. When
described in the operation and mainte- performing welding work, always wear welding
nance manual before operating the gloves, apron, shielding goggles, cap, etc.
machine. Read and understand what is q Before starting work, warm up your body thor-
described in this manual before starting the oughly to start work under good condition.
work. q Avoid continuing work for long hours and take
q Before performing any greasing or repairs, rests with proper intervals to keep your body in
read all the safety labels stuck to the machine. good condition. Take a rest in a specified safe
For the locations of the safety labels and place.
detailed explanation of precautions, see the
operation and maintenance manual. Safety points
q Locate a place in the repair workshop to keep
1 Good arrangement
the tools and removed parts. Always keep the
tools and parts in their correct places. Always 2 Correct work clothes
keep the work area clean and make sure that 3 Observance of work standard
there is no dirt, water or oil on the floor. Smoke
4 Practice of making and checking signals
only in the areas provided for smoking. Never
smoke while working. Prohibition of operation and handling by
5
q When performing any work, always wear the unlicensed workers
safety shoes and helmet. Do not wear loose 6 Safety check before starting work
work cloths, or clothes with buttons missing. Wearing protective goggles
1. Always wear the protective eyeglasses 7
(for cleaning or grinding work)
when hitting parts with a hammer.
2. Always wear the protective eyeglasses Wearing shielding goggles and protectors
8
(for welding work)
when grinding parts with a grinder, etc.
q When performing any work with two or more 9 Good physical condition and preparation
workers, always agree on the working proce- Precautions against work which you are
dure before starting. While working, always 10
not used to or you are used to too much
keep conversations of the work between your
fellow workers and your self on any step of the
work. During the work, hang the warning tag of Preparation
“UNDER WORKING” in the operator's q Before adding oil or making any repairs, place
compartment. the machine on a firm and level ground, and
q Only qualified workers must perform the work apply the parking brake and chock the wheels
and operation which require license or qualifi- or tracks to prevent the machine from moving.
cation. q Before starting work, lower the work equipment
q Keep the tools in good condition. And learn the (blade, ripper, bucket, etc.) to the ground. If it is
correct way to use the tools, and use the not possible to lower the equipment to the
proper ones among them. Before starting the ground, insert the lock pin or use blocks to pre-
work, thoroughly check the tools, forklift truck, vent the work equipment from falling. And be
service car, etc. sure to lock all the work equipment control
levers and hang a warning tag on them.

00-200 2 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


200 Foreword and general information
Foreword, safety and general information SEN06260-00

q When performing the disassembling or assem- q When removing the part which is under internal
bling work, support the machine securely with pressure or reaction force of the spring, always
blocks, jacks, or stands before starting the leave two bolts in diagonal positions. Loosen
work. those two bolts gradually and alternately and
q Remove all of mud and oil from the steps or release the pressure, then, remove the part.
other places used to get on and off the q When removing the part, be careful not to
machine completely. Always use the handrails, break or damage the electrical wiring. The
ladders of steps when getting on or off the damaged wiring may cause electrical fires.
machine. Never jump on or off the machine. q When removing piping, prevent the fuel or oil
When the scaffold is not provided, use steps or from spilling out. If any fuel or oil drips onto the
stepladder to secure your footing. floor, wipe it off immediately. Fuel or oil on the
floor can cause you to slip and can even cause
Precautions during work fires.
q For the machine equipped with the battery dis- q As a general rule, do not use gasoline to wash
connect switch, check that the system operat- parts. Do not use gasoline to clean the electri-
ing lamp is turned off before starting the work. cal parts, in particular.
Then, turn the battery disconnect switch to the q Reinstall the parts removed to their original
OFF (Q) position and remove the switch key. places. Replace the damaged parts and the
For the machine not equipped with the battery parts which must not be used with new ones.
disconnect switch, remove the cable from the When installing the hoses and wiring har-
battery before starting the work. Be sure to nesses, be careful that they are not damaged
remove the negative end (-) of the battery by contacting with other parts when the
cable first. machine is operated.
q Release the remaining pressure in the circuits q When connecting the high pressure hoses and
completely before the work when the parts in tubes, make sure that they are not twisted. The
the circuits of oil, fuel, coolant and air are dis- damaged high pressure hoses and tubes are
connected or removed. When the cap of the oil very dangerous when they are installed. So, be
filter, drain plug or oil pressure pickup plug is extremely careful when connecting the high
removed, loose them slowly to prevent the oil pressure pipings. In addition, check that their
from spurting out. connections are correct.
q When removing or installing the checking plug q When assembling or installing the parts, be
or the piping in the fuel circuit, wait 30 seconds sure to tighten the bolts to the specified torque.
or longer after the engine is shut down and When installing the protective parts such as
start the work after the remaining pressure is guards, or the parts which vibrate violently or
released from the fuel circuit. rotate at high speeds, be sure to check that
q Immediately after the engine is shut down, the they are installed correctly.
coolant and oil in the circuits are hot. Be care- q When aligning two holes, never insert your fin-
ful not to get scalded by the hot coolant and oil. gers or hand into the holes. Align the holes
Start the work after checking that the coolant with care so that your fingers are not caught in
and oil are cooled down sufficiently. the hole.
q Start the work after the engine is shut down. Be q When measuring hydraulic pressure, check
sure to shut down the engine when working on that the measuring tools are correctly installed.
or around the rotating parts in particular. When q Pay attention to safety when removing and
checking the machine without shutting down installing the tracks of the track type machines.
the engine (measuring oil pressure, engine When removing the track, it separates sud-
speed, oil or coolant temperature), take denly. The workers should not stand at either
extreme care not to get caught in the rotating end of the track.
parts or the working equipment. q If the engine is operated for a long time in a
q The hoist or crane must be used to sling the closed place which is not ventilated well, you
components weighing 25 kg or heavier. Check may suffer from gas poisoning. Accordingly,
the slings (wire rope, nylon sling, chain and open the windows and doors to ventilate the
hook) for damage before the work. Use the place well.
slings with ample capacity and install them to
the proper places. Operate the hoist or crane
slowly to prevent the component from hitting
any other part. Do not work with any part still
raised by the hoist or crane.

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 00-200 3


200 Foreword and general information
SEN06260-00 Foreword, safety and general information

Precautions for slinging work and making sig-


nals
q Only one appointed worker must make signals
and co-worker must communicate with each
other frequently. The appointed signaler must
make specified signals clearly at the place
where the signaler is well seen from the opera-
tor's seat and where the signaler can
see the working condition easily. The signaler
must always stand in front of the load and
guide the operator safely.
1. Do not stand under the load.
2. Do not step on the load.
q Check the slings before starting sling work.
q Keep putting on the gloves during sling work. q When installing wire ropes to an angular load,
(Put on the leather gloves, if available.) apply pads to protect the wire ropes. If the
q Measure the weight of the load by the eye and load is slippery, apply proper material to pre-
check its center of gravity. vent the wire rope from slipping.
q Use the proper sling according to the weight of q Use the specified eye bolts and fix wire ropes,
the load and method of slinging. If too thick chains, etc. to them with shackles, etc.
wire ropes are used to sling a light load, the q Apply wire ropes to the middle portion of the
load may slip and fall. hook.
q Do not sling a load with one wire rope only. If a Slinging near the tip of the hook may
do so, the load may rotate or the sling gets cause the rope to slip off the hook during
loose and the sling may slip off. Install two or hoisting. The hook has the maximum
more wire ropes symmetrically. strength at the middle part.
k Slinging with one rope may cause turning
of the load during hoisting, untwisting of
the rope, or slipping of the rope from its
original slinging position on the load,
which can result in a dangerous accident.
q Hanging angle must be 60 degrees or smaller
as a rule.
q When hanging a heavy load (25kg or heavier),
the hanging angle of the rope must be nar-
rower than that of the hook.
a When slinging a load with two ropes or
more, the larger the hanging angle is, the
larger the tension of each rope. The figure
bellow shows the variation of allowable
load in kN {kg} when hoisting is made with
two ropes, each of which is allowed to q Do not use twisted or kinked wire ropes.
sling up to 9.8 kN {1000kg} a load verti- q When slinging up a load, observe the follow-
cally, at various hanging angles. When the ing.
two ropes sling a load vertically, up to19.6 1. Wind up the rope slowly until the wire rope
kN {2000 kg} of total weight can be sus- tensions. When putting your hands on the
pended. This weight is reduced to 9.8 kN wire ropes, do not grasp them but press
{1000 kg} when the two ropes make a them down from above. If you grasp them,
hanging angle of 120 degrees. If the two your fingers may be caught.
ropes sling a 19.6 kN {2000 kg} load at a 2. After the wire ropes are stretched, stop
hanging angle of 150 degrees, each rope the crane and check the condition of the
is subjected to a force as large as 39.2 kN slung load, wire ropes, and pads.
{4000 kg}. 3. If the load is unstable or the wire rope or
chains are twisted, lower the load and lift it
up again.
4. Do not lift up the load at an angle.
q When lowering a load, pay attention to the fol-
lowing.

00-200 4 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


200 Foreword and general information
Foreword, safety and general information SEN06260-00

1. When lifting down a load, stop it tempo- q After finishing the work, stop the hoist at the
rarily at 30 cm above the floor, and then specified position and raise the hook to at least
lower it slowly. two meters above the floor. Do not leave the
2. Check that the load is stable, and then sling attached to the hook.
remove the sling.
3. Remove kinks and dirt from the wire ropes Selecting wire ropes
and chains used for the sling work, and q Select adequate ropes depending on the
put them in the specified place. weight of the parts to be hoisted, referring to
the table below
Precautions for using mobile crane Wire ropes (standard “Z” twist ropes without galva-
a Read the Operation and Maintenance Manual nizing) (JIS G3525, Type 6x37-A)
of the crane carefully in advance and operate
the crane safely. Nominal
Allowable load
diameter of rope
Precautions for using overhead traveling crane mm kN ton
k The hoist or crane must be used to sling 10 8.8 0.9
the components weighing 25 kg or heavier. 12 12.7 1.3
A part weighing 25 kg or heavier in “disas- 14 17.3 1.7
sembly and assembly” section is indicated 16 22.6 2.3
with the symbol of 4. 18 28.6 2.9
20 35.3 3.6
q Before starting work, check the wire ropes,
25 55.3 5.6
brake, clutch, controller, rails, over winding
30 79.6 8.1
prevention device, ground fault circuit inter-
rupter for electric shock prevention, crane colli- 40 141.6 14.4
sio n pr even tion d evice , an d en erg izing 50 221.6 22.6
warning lamp, and check the following safety 60 318.3 32.4
items.
q Observe the signals for sling work. a The allowable load is calculated as one sixth of
q Operate the hoist at a safe place. the breaking load of the rope to be used
q Be sure to check the directions of the direction (safety coefficient: 6).
indication plate (north, south, east and west)
and the operating button. Precautions for disconnecting and connecting
q Do not sling a load at an angle. Do not move hoses and tubes in air conditioner circuit
the crane while the slung load is swinging.
q Do not raise or lower a load while the crane is Disconnection
k When replacing the air conditioner unit, air
moving longitudinally or laterally.
q Do not drag a sling.
conditioner compressor, condenser or
q When lifting up a load, stop it just after it leaves
receiver drier, etc., collect the refrigerant
the ground and check safety, and then lift it up.
(air conditioner gas: R134a) from the air
q Consider the travel route in advance and lift up
conditioner circuit before disconnecting
a load to a safe height.
the air conditioner hoses.
q Place the control switch in a position where it
a Ask a qualified person for collecting, adding
will not be an obstacle to work and passage.
and filling operations of the refrigerant (air con-
q After operating the hoist, do not swing the con-
ditioner gas: R134a).
trol switch.
a Never release the refrigerant (air conditioner
q Remember the position of the main switch so
gas: R134a) to the atmosphere.
k If refrigerant gas (air conditioner gas:
that you can turn off the power immediately in
an emergency. R134a) gets in your eyes, you may lose
q Shut down the main switch when the hoist
your sight. And if it touches your skin, you
stops because of a blackout. When turning on
may suffer from frostbite. Put on protective
a switch which is turned OFF by the ground
eyeglasses, gloves and working cloth with
fault circuit interrupter for electric shock pre-
long sleeves while collecting the refrigerant
vention, check that the devices related to that
or filling the air conditioner circuit with the
switch are not in operating condition.
refrigerant.
q If you find an obstacle around the hoist, stop
the operation.

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 00-200 5


200 Foreword and general information
SEN06260-00 Foreword, safety and general information

q When loosening the nuts fixing air conditioner


hoses and tubes, be sure to use two wrenches;
use one wrench to fix and use the other one to
loosen the nut.

Connection
q When installing the hose for the air conditioner
circuit, take care not to allow invasion of dirt,
dusts and water into the hose.
q Check that the O-rings are fitted to the joints
when connecting the air conditioner piping.
q Once an O-ring is used, it is deformed and
deteriorated. Accordingly, do not reuse it.
q When removing the O-rings, use a soft tool so
that the piping is not damaged. For tightening torques, see “Others”, “Precau-
q Check that the O-ring is not damaged or deteri- tions for disconnection and connection of air
orated. conditioner piping”.
q Apply compressor oil for refrigerant (R134a) to
the O-ring.
a However, do not apply oil to the threaded
portion of a bolt, nut or union.
Manufacturer Part name
DENSO ND-OIL8
VALEO THERMAL ZXL100PG (equivalent to
SYSTEMS PAG46)
SANDEN SP-10

q When tightening nuts of the air conditioner


hoses and tubes, be sure to use two wrenches.
Use one wrench to fix and tighten the nut with
the other wrench to the specified torque (Use a
torque wrench for tightening).
a Example of fitting of O-ring
q An O-ring is fitted to every joint of the air
conditioner piping.

00-200 6 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


200 Foreword and general information
Foreword, safety and general information SEN06260-00

Fire prevention q When performing grinding or welding work


Action if fire occurs on the machine, move any flammable
q Turn the starting switch to the OFF position to materials to a safe place before starting.
shutdown the engine.
q Use the handrails and steps to get off the
machine.
q Do not jump off the machine. You may fall or
suffer serious injury.
q The fume generated by a fire contains harm-
ful materials which have a bad influence on a
human body when they are sucked.
Don't breathe a fume.
q After a fire, there may be harmful compounds
left. If it touches your skin it may have a bad
influence on your body.
Be sure to wear rubber gloves when handle
the materials left after the fire.
The material of the gloves, which is recom-
mended is polychloroprene (Neoprene) or
polyvinyl chloride (in the lower temperature
environment).
When wearing cotton-work-gloves, wear rub-
ber gloves under them.

Prevent fire
q Fire caused by fuel, oil, coolant or window
washer fluid
Do not bring any flame or fire close to flamma-
ble substances such as fuel, oil, coolant or
window washer fluid.There is danger that they
may catch fire. Always observe the following. q Fire caused by accumulation or attachment
q Do not smoke or use any flame near fuel of flammable material
or other flammable substances. q Remove any dry leaves, chips, pieces of
q Shut down the engine before adding fuel. paper, coal dust, or any other flammable
q Do not leave the machine when adding materials accumulated or attached to or
fuel or oil. around the engine exhaust manifold, muf-
q Tighten all the fuel and oil caps securely. fler, or battery, or on the undercovers.
q Be careful not to spill fuel on overheated q To prevent fires from being caught,
surfaces or on parts of the electrical sys- remove any flammable materials such as
tem. dry leaves, chips, pieces of paper, coal
q After adding fuel or oil, wipe up any spilled dust, or any other flammable materials
fuel or oil. accumulated around the cooling system
q Put greasy rags and other flammable (radiator, oil cooler) or on the undercover.
materials into a safe container to maintain
safety at the workplace. q Fire coming from electric wiring
q When washing parts with oil, use a non- Short circuits in the electrical system can
flammable oil. Do not use diesel oil or gas- cause fire. Always observe the following.
oline.There is danger that they may catch q Keep all the electric wiring connections
fire. clean and securely tightened.
q Do not weld or use a cutting torch to cut q Check the wiring every day for looseness
any pipes or tubes that contain flammable or damage. Reconnect any loose connec-
liquids. tors or refasten wiring clamps. Repair or
q Determine well-ventilated areas for storing replace any damaged wiring.
oil and fuel. Keep the oil and fuel in the
specified place and do not allow unautho-
rized persons to enter.

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 00-200 7


200 Foreword and general information
SEN06260-00 Foreword, safety and general information

q Fire caused by piping Dispose of waste materials


Check that all the clamps for the hoses and To prevent pollution, pay full attention to the way to
tubes, guards, and cushions are securely fixed dispose of waste materials.
in position. q Always put the oil and coolant drained from the
If they are loose, they may vibrate during oper- machine in containers. Never drain the oil and
ation and rub against other parts.There is dan- coolant directly onto the ground or dump into
ger that this may lead to damage to the hoses the sewage system, rivers, the sea, or lakes.
and cause high-pressure oil to spurt out, lead- q Observe the related laws and regulations when
ing to fire and serious personal injury or death. disposing of harmful objects such as oil, fuel,
coolant, solvent, filters, and batteries.
q Fire around the machine due to highly
heated exhaust gas
This machine is equipped with KDPF
(Komatsu Diesel Particulate Filter).
KDPF is a system for purifying soot in exhaust
gas. The exhaust gas discharged during the
purification process (regeneration) can be
higher temperature than that of existing mod-
els. Do not bring any flammable material close
to the outlet of the exhaust pipe.
q If there are thatched houses, dry leaves or
pieces of paper around the job site, set the
system to the “Regeneration Disable”
before starting operation to prevent fire
hazard of highly heated exhaust gas Some kinds of rubber and plastics may produce
caused by KDPF regeneration. poisonous gas harmful to human body when they
See the operation and maintenance man- are burned.
ual for the setting procedure. q As for rubber, plastics, or parts (hoses, cables,
and wiring harnesses, etc.) which contain
q Explosion caused by lighting equipment those materials, ask the industrial waste treat-
q When checking fuel, oil, battery electro- ment firms for their disposals in accordance
lyte, or coolant, always use lighting equip- with the local regulations.
ment with anti-explosion specifications.
q When taking the electrical power for the
lighting equipment from the machine itself,
follow the instructions in the operation and
maintenance manual.

00-200 8 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


200 Foreword and general information
How to read the shop manual SEN06260-00

How to read the shop manual 1

q Some attachments and optional parts described in this shop manual may not be arranged for certain
areas. Contact your Komatsu distributor if one or some of them are required.
q Materials and specifications are subject to change without notice.
q The shop manuals are available for “Machine part” and “Engine part”. For the engine, see the shop
manual for the same model of the engine as the one which is mounted on the machine.

Composition of shop manual


q This shop manual describes the technical information required for the services performed in a work-
shop.
The shop manual is divided into the following chapters for the convenience of use.

00. Index and foreword


q This section includes the index, foreword, safety and basic information.

01. Specification
q This section explains the specifications of the machine.

10. Structure, function and maintenance standard


q This section explains the structure, function, and maintenance standard values of each component. The
structure and function sub-section explains the structure and function of each component. It serves not
only to give an understanding of the structure, but also serves as reference material for troubleshooting.
The maintenance standard sub-section explains the criteria and remedies for disassembly and service.

20. Standard value table


q The standard values for a new machine and trouble shooting are described. This standard value table is
used for testing and adjusting, and determining a failure at troubleshooting.

30. Testing and adjusting


q This section describes the measuring tools and how to measure, and how to adjust various parts. As for
the standard value and failure criterion, see the standard value table.

40. Troubleshooting
q This section describes the troubleshooting in a suspected area when a failure occurs and the remedy for
the failure. Troubleshooting is described by each failure mode.

50. Disassembly and assembly


q This section explains the procedures for removing, installing, disassembling, and assembling each part
or component and the special tools for the works as well as precautions for doing them safely. In addi-
tion, tightening torque, and quantity and weight of coating material, oil, grease, and coolant required for
the works are also explained.

80. Appendix
q The structure and function, testing and adjusting, and troubleshooting for all of the other components or
equipment which can not be separately classified are explained together in the appendix.

90. Diagrams and drawings


q This section gives hydraulic circuit diagrams and electrical circuit diagrams.

Revision and distribution


Any additions, revisions, or other change of notices will be sent to KOMATSU distributors. Get the most up-
to-date information before you start any work.

Filing method
File by the brochures in the correct order of the form number printed in the shop manual composition table.

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 00-200 9


200 Foreword and general information
SEN06260-00 How to read the shop manual

q Revised edition mark


When a manual is revised, the ones and tens digits of the form number of each brochure is increased by
1. (Example: 00, 01, 02 …)

q Revisions
Revised brochures are shown in the shop manual composition table.

Symbol
Important safety and quality portions are marked with the following symbols so that the shop manual is used
practically.

Symbol Item Remarks

k
The special safety precautions required for performing work are
Safety
described.
The special technical precautions or other precautions for preserving
a Caution
standards required when performing work are described.
The weight of part or component and the cautions required when
4
Weight selecting hoisting wire or when working posture is important are
described.

3
Tightening The tightening torques that require special attention during assembly
torque work are described.

2
The places to be coated with adhesives, etc. during assembling are
Coat
indicated.

5
The places to which oil is supplied and the quantity of the oil are indi-
Oil, coolant
cated.

6
The places from which oil is drained and quantity of the oil are indi-
Drain
cated.

Unit
q In this shop manual, the units are indicated with International System of units (SI).
q For reference, Gravitational System of units which is used to be used is indicated in parentheses of { }.

00-200 10 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


200 Foreword and general information
Explanation of terms for maintenance standard SEN06260-00

Explanation of terms for maintenance standard 1


q The chapter of maintenance standard shows judgement criteria to determine the products to be
replaced or to be reused. The judgement criteria are described by using the following terms.

Standard dimension and tolerance q When some parts are repaired, the value of
q To be accurate, the finished dimension of a performance/function is set to the standard
part is slightly different from one to another. value.
q To specify the finished dimension of a part, a
certain dimension is set for the part and an
allowable difference from that dimension is
indicated.
q The above dimension set is called the “stan-
dard dimension” and the range of difference
from the standard dimension is called the “tol-
erance”.
q The standard dimension and tolerance are
indicated by attaching the symbols of + or -
and a number on the right side of the standard
dimension.

Example:
Standard dimension Tolerance
–0.022
120
–0.126

q The tolerance may be indicated in the text and


a table as “standard dimension (upper limit of
tolerance/lower limit of tolerance).”
Example: 120(-0.022/-0.126)
q Usually, the dimension of a hole and the
dimension of a shaft to be inserted into the
hole are indicated by the same standard
dimension and different tolerances of the hole
and shaft. The tightness of fit is decided by the
tolerance.
q Indication of dimension of rotating shaft and
Standard interference
hole and their related drawing.
q When the diameter of a hole of a part shown in
the given standard dimension and tolerance
Example:
table is smaller than that of the shaft to be
Standard Tolerance inserted, the difference between those diame-
dimension Shaft Hole ters is called the “interference”.
–0.030 +0.046 q Subtract the maximum dimension of the hole
60
–0.076 +0 from the minimum dimension of the shaft and
call it (A). Subtract the minimum dimension of
Standard clearance and standard value the hole from the maximum dimension of the
q The clearance made when new parts are shaft and call it (B). The range between (A)
assembled is called the standard clearance, and (B) is the “standard interference”.
which is indicated by the range from the mini- q After repairing or replacing some parts, mea-
mum clearance to the maximum clearance. sure the dimension of their hole and shaft and
q When some parts are repaired, the clearance check that the interference is in the standard
is generally adjusted to the standard clear- range.
ance.
q The values indicating performance and func-
tion of new products or equivalent are called
the “standard value”, which is indicated by a
range or a target value.

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 00-200 11


200 Foreword and general information
SEN06260-00 Explanation of terms for maintenance standard

Repair limit and allowable value or allowable


dimension
q The dimensions of parts change because of
the wear or deformation while they are used.
When the dimension changes exceeding cer-
tain value, the parts can not be used any
longer. This value is called “repair limit”.
q If a part is worn to the repair limit, it must be
replaced or repaired.
q The performance and function of the products
lower while they are used. When the value of
the performance and function lowers exceed-
ing a certain limit and it influences the opera-
tion etc., this value is called the allowable
value or allowable dimension.
q A product whose dimension is out of the allow-
able value, must be repaired. However, since
the allowable values are generally estimated
through various tests or experiences in most
cases, the judgement must be made in consid-
eration of the operating condition and cus-
tomer’s requirement.

Allowable clearance
q Parts can be used until the clearance between
them is increased to a certain limit. The limit at
which those parts cannot be used is called the
“allowable clearance”.
q If the clearance between the parts exceeds the
allowable clearance, they must be replaced or
repaired.

Allowable interference
q The allowable maximum interference between
the hole of a part and the shaft of another part
to be assembled is called the “allowable inter-
ference”.
q The allowable interference shows the repair
limit of the part of smaller tolerance.
q The parts whose interferences are out of the
allowable interference must be replaced or
repaired.

00-200 12 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


200 Foreword and general information
Handling equipment of fuel system devices SEN06260-00

Handling equipment of fuel system devices 1


q The common rail fuel injection system (CRI)
consists of more precise parts than the parts
used in the conventional fuel injection pump
and nozzle. If foreign material enters this sys-
tem, it may cause a failure. Use special care to
prevent entry of the foreign material when ser-
vicing the fuel system.

Use care for working environment


q Avoid filter change or repairing the machine in
rain or high winds, or at places where there is a
lot of dust.

Sealing openings
q Plug the pipes and the openings of the compo-
nents which are removed with the caps, tapes,
vinyl bags, etc. to prevent foreign material from
entering. Never perform repair works under the
condition that the openings are left as they are
or plugged with cloths as foreign material may
enter or environment may be polluted by the oil
leaked. Do not discard the waste oil some-
where or other. Hand it over to your customer
for disposal, or dispose it by yourself.

How to clean parts when dirt is stuck .


q If any dirt or dust sticks the parts of the fuel
system, clean it off thoroughly with clean fuel.

Precautions for replacing fuel filter cartridge


q Be sure to use the Komatsu genuine fuel filter
cartridge.
q The common rail fuel injection system (CRI)
consists of more precise parts than the parts
used in the conventional fuel injection pump
and nozzle. In order to prevent foreign material
from entering this system, the filter employs a
specially high performance of filter element. If
a filter element other than the genuine one is
used, the fuel system may have a failure.
Accordingly, never use such a filter element.

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 00-200 13


200 Foreword and general information
SEN06260-00 Handling of intake system parts

Handling of intake system parts 1


q The Komatsu Variable Geometry Turbocharger
(KVGT) consists of more precise parts (vari-
able mechanism) than the parts used in the
conventional turbocharger. If foreign material
enters this system, it may cause a failure. Use
special care to prevent entry of the foreign
material when servicing the air intake system.

Be careful of working environment


q Avoid the repair work of the machine in rain or
strong wind or at the places where there is a lot
of dust.

Sealing openings
q Plug the pipes and the openings of the compo-
nents which are removed, with the caps, tapes,
vinyl bags, etc. to prevent foreign material from
entering. Never perform repair works under the
condition that the openings are left open or
plugged with rag since foreign material may
enter.

00-200 14 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


200 Foreword and general information
Handling of hydraulic equipment SEN06260-00

Handling of hydraulic equipment 1


q With the increase in pressure and precision of
the hydraulic components, the most common
cause of a failure is dirt (foreign material) in the
hydraulic circuit. Therefore, the special care
must be taken when adding hydraulic oil,or
w h en d i s a s s em b l i ng o r a s s e m bl i n g t h e
hydraulic components.

Be careful of working environment


q Avoid adding hydraulic oil, replacing filters, or
repairing the machine in rain or high winds, or
at places where there is a lot of dust.

Disassembly and maintenance work in the field


q When disassembly or maintenance work of Preventing intrusion of foreign materials during
the hydraulic is performed in the field, there is refilling operations.
danger of dust entering the components. It is
q Care must be taken when adding hydraulic oil
also difficult to check the performance of the
so that foreign material does not enter. Keep
components after repairs, so it is desirable to
the oil filler port and the area around it, oil sup-
use the component exchange service. The dis-
ply pump and oil container clean. If an oil
assembly and assembly of the hydraulic com-
cleaning device is used, it is possible to
ponents must be performed in the specially
remove the dirt that is collected during storage.
arranged dustproof workshop and the perfor-
It is a surer means.
mance test of the components must be per-
formed with the special testing equipment.

Replacing hydraulic oil while its temperature is


Sealing openings high
q Plug the pipes and the openings of the compo- q When the hydraulic oil is warm, it flows easily.
nents which are removed with the caps, tapes, In addition, sludge can also be drained from
vinyl bags, etc. to prevent foreign material from the circuit together with the oil. So, it is better
entering. Never leave the openings of the to change the hydraulic oil while it is warm.
pipes and hoses without being covered or When changing the hydraulic oil, the old oil
plugged with cloth as foreign material may must be drained as much as possible. (Drain
enter them or environment may be polluted by the oil not only from the hydraulic tank, but also
the oil leaked. Do not discard the waste oil from the filter housing and the drain plug hole
somewhere or other. Hand it over to your cus- in the circuit.) If the old oil is left in the system,
tomer for disposal, or dispose it by yourself. the contaminant and sludge in the oil mix with
the new oil and shorten the life of the new
hydraulic oil.

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 00-200 15


200 Foreword and general information
SEN06260-00 Handling of hydraulic equipment

Flushing operations
q After disassembling the equipment or when
changing the hydraulic oil with new one, flush
the system to remove the contaminant and
sludge left in the hydraulic circuit as well as the
oil which includes them. Normally, flushing is
performed twice. Primary flushing is performed
by use of the flushing oil and the secondary
flushing is performed by use of the specified
hydraulic oil.

Cleaning operations
q After repairing the hydraulic equipment (pump,
control valve, etc.) or when the machine is in
operation, perform oil cleaning to remove the
sludge or contaminant in the hydraulic oil cir-
cuit. The oil cleaning equipment can remove
the ultra fine (approximately 3 μm) particles
that the filter built in the hydraulic equipment
can not remove. So, it is an extremely effective
device.

00-200 16 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


200 Foreword and general information
Method of disconnecting and connectingof push-pull type SEN06260-00

Method of disconnecting and connectingof push-pull type coupler 1


k Loosen the oil filler cap of the hydraulic tank slowly to release the remaining pressure in the
hydraulic tank.
k Even if the remaining pressure is released from the hydraulic tank, some hydraulic oil flows out
when the hose is disconnected. Accordingly, prepare an oil container.

Type 1

Disconnection Connection
1. Hold adapter (1) and push hose joint (2) into 1. Hold hose adapter (1) or hose (5) and insert it
mating adapter (3). (Fig. 1) in mating adapter (3) aligning them with each
a It can be pushed in by approximately other. (Fig. 4)
3.5mm. a Do not hold rubber cap part (4).
a Do not hold rubber cap portion (4). 2. After inserting the hose fitting in the adapter on
2. While pushing hose joint (2) into adapter (3), the other side perfectly, pull it back to check
push rubber cap (4) against adapter (3) until the connecting condition. (Fig.4)
“click” is heard. (Fig. 2) a When the hose fitting is pulled back, the
3. Hold hose adapter (1) or hose (5) and pull it rubber cap will move toward the hose,
out. (Fig. 3) however, it is not a problem.
a Since some hydraulic oil flows out, pre-
pare an oil container.

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 00-200 17


200 Foreword and general information
SEN06260-00 Method of disconnecting and connectingof push-pull type

Type 2

Disconnection Connection
1. While holding the fitting, push body (7) in 1. While holding the fitting, push body (7) in
straight until sliding prevention ring (6) hits straight until sliding prevention ring (6) hits
contact surface (a) at the hexagonal part on contact surface (a) at the hexagonal part on
the male side. (Fig. 6) the male side to connect it. (Fig. 9)
2. While keeping the condition of Step 1, turn
lever (8) to the right (clockwise). (Fig. 7)
3. While keeping the conditions of Steps 1 and 2,
pull out whole body (7) to disconnect it. (Fig. 8)

00-200 18 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


200 Foreword and general information
Method of disconnecting and connectingof push-pull type SEN06260-00

Type 3

Disconnection Connection
1. While holding the fitting, push body (9) in 1. While holding the fitting, push body (9) in
straight until sliding prevention ring (8) hits straight until sliding prevention ring (8) hits
contact surface (b) at the hexagonal portion on contact surface (a) at the hexagonal portion on
the male side. (Fig. 10) the male side to connect them. (Fig. 13)
2. While keeping the condition of Step 1, push
cover (10) straight until it hits contact surface
(b) of the hexagonal portion on the male side.
(Fig. 11)
3. While keeping the conditions of Steps 1 and 2,
pull out whole body (9) to disconnect it. (Fig.
12)

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 00-200 19


200 Foreword and general information
SEN06260-00 Handling of electrical equipment

Handling of electrical equipment 1


q To maintain the performance of the machine over a long period, and to prevent failures or troubles
before they occur, correct “operation”, “maintenance and inspection” “troubleshooting”, and “repairs”
must be performed. This section deals particularly with correct repair procedures for mechatronics com-
ponents and is aimed at improving the quality of repairs. For this purpose, it describes the working pro-
cedures in “Handling of electrical equipment”.

Precautions for handling electric equipment


Handling wiring harnesses and connectors
q Wiring harnesses consist of wires connecting
one component to another component, con-
nectors used for connecting and disconnecting
one wire from another wire, and protectors or
tubes used for protecting the wires.
q Compared with other electrical components fit-
ted in boxes or cases, wiring harnesses are
more likely to be affected by the direct effects
of rain water, heat, or vibration. Furthermore,
during inspection and repair operations, they
are frequently removed and installed again, so
they are likely to suffer deformation or damage.
For this reason, it is necessary to be extremely Defective crimping or soldering of connectors
careful when handling the wiring harnesses. q The pins of the male and female connectors
are attached to wires by crimping or soldering.
If excessive force is applied to the wire, the
joining area may become loose, which may
result in a defective connection or breakage.

Main failures occurring in wiring harness


Defective contact of connectors (defective con-
tact between male and female connectors)
q Problems with defective contact are likely to
occur because the male connector is not prop- Disconnections in wiring
erly inserted into the female connector,or q If the wiring harness is pulled to disconnect the
b ecau se one or bot h of conn ecto rs a re connector, or the components are lifted with a
deformed or the position is not correctly crane while the wiring harness is still con-
aligned, or because there is corrosion or oxi- nected, or a heavy object hits the wiring har-
dization of the contact surfaces. The corroded ness, the crimping of the connector may
or oxidized contact surfaces may become separate, or the soldering may be damaged, or
shiny again (and contact may become normal) the wiring harness may be broken.
by connecting and disconnecting the connec-
tors approximately ten times.

00-200 20 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


200 Foreword and general information
Handling of electrical equipment SEN06260-00

Oil, mud or dirt stuck to connector


q If any oil or grease is stuck to the connector
and an oil film is formed on the mating surface
of the male and female pins, the oil prevents
electricity from passing through, resulting in
defective contact. If any oil or grease, mud or
dirt is stuck to the connector, wipe it off with a
dry cloth or blow it with compressed air and
spray it with electrical contact restorer.
a When wiping the joint portion of the con-
nector, be careful not to apply excessive
force or deform the pins.
a If there is oil or water in the compressed
air, it causes the contacts to become dirt-
ier. So, remove the oil and water from the
High-pressure water entering connector
compressed air completely before clean-
q The connector is designed to make it difficult ing the connector with the compressed air.
for water to enter (drip-proof structure), but if
high-pressure water is sprayed directly on the
connector, water may enter the connector,
depending on the direction of the water jet.
Accordingly, take care not to spray water over
the connector.
The connector is designed to prevent water
from entering, but once water does enter, it is
difficult to drain it. If water should get into the
connector, the pins will be short-circuited by
the water. So if any water gets in, immediately
dry the connector or take other appropriate
action before passing electricity through it.

Removing, installing, and drying connectors


and wiring harnesses
Disconnecting connectors
1. Hold the connectors when disconnecting.
q Disconnect connectors by holding the
connector bodies. For the connectors held
by a screw, loosen the screw fully, then
hold the male and female connectors with
each hand respectively and pull them
apart horizontally. For the connectors with
lock stopper, press down the stopper with
your thumb and pull the connectors apart.
Entry of water, mud or dirt when disconnecting a Never pull the connector with one
a connector hand.
q If any water, mud or dirt is stuck to the outside
surface of a connector, it can enter inside the
connector when the connector is discon-
nected. Before disconnecting the connector,
wipe off any stuck water or dirt by using a
piece of dry cloth or blow it with compressed
air.

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 00-200 21


200 Foreword and general information
SEN06260-00 Handling of electrical equipment

a If the machine is left disassembled for


a long time, it is particularly easy for
improper contact to occur, so always
cover the connector.

2. When removing from clips


q Both of the connector and clip have stop-
pers, which are engaged with each other
when the connector is connected.
Connecting connectors
1. Check the connector visually.
q Check that there is no oil, dirt or water
stick to the connector pins (joint portion).
q Check that the connector pins are free
from deformation, defective contact, corro-
sion, or damage.
q Check that external surfaces of the con-
nectors are free from damage or break-
age.
a If any oil, water or dirt is stuck to the con-
nector, wipe it off with a dry cloth. If any
water is inside the connector, warm the
connector and the inside of the wiring har-
ness with a dryer. But be careful not to
q When removing a connector from a clip,
make it too hot as it causes short circuit.
pull the connector in a parallel direction to
a If there is any damage or breakage,
the clip for removing stoppers.
replace the connector.
a If the connector is pried up and down
2. Fix the connector securely.
or to the right and left, the housing
q Align the connectors correctly, and fit them
may break.
securely. For the connectors with the lock
stopper, push in the connectors until
“click” is heard.

3. Action to take after removing connectors


q After removing the connector, cover it with
the vinyl bag to prevent entry of dust,
3. Correct the protrusion of the boot and mis-
dirt,oil or water in the contact portion.
alignment of the wiring harness

00-200 22 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


200 Foreword and general information
Handling of electrical equipment SEN06260-00

q For connectors fitted with the boot, correct Connection


any extrusion of the boot. In addition, if the 1. Push in female connector (2) horizontally until
wiring harness or the clamp is out of the the lock clicks. (Arrow: x)
position, put it in its original position. 2. Since locks (a) and (b) may not be set com-
a If the connector cannot be corrected pletely, push in female connector (2) with curv-
easily, remove the clamp and adjust ing movement until the locks are set normally.
the position. (Arrow: x, y, and z)
a Lock (a) in the figure is pulled down (not
set completely), and lock (b) is set com-
pletely.

q If the connector clamp is removed, be


sure to return it to its original position. And
check that it is securely installed.
Drying wiring harness
q If there is any oil or dirt on the wiring harness,
wipe it off with a dry cloth. Avoid washing by
using steam. If the wire harness must be
washed in water, do not apply high pressure
water or steam directly to the wiring harness.
If water gets directly on the connector, do as
follows.
1. Disconnect the connector and wipe off the
water with a dry cloth.
a If the connector is to be blown with dry
compressed air, there is a risk that oil in
the air may cause defective contact of the
conditioner, remove oil and water in the air
Deutsch connector (DT8-pin, DT12-pin) before starting air blow.
Disconnection
1. While pressing locks (a) and (b) from each side
respectively, pull out female connector (2).

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 00-200 23


200 Foreword and general information
SEN06260-00 Handling of electrical equipment

2. Dry the inside of the connector with a dryer. Handling of connectors used on engine
If water gets inside the connector, use a dryer Slide, lock type (Type 1) (FRAMATOME-3,
to dry the connector. FRAMATOME-2)
a Hot air from the dryer can be used, but
Disconnection
regulate the time to use hot air in order to
1. Slide lock (L1) to the right.
prevent the connector or related parts
2. While pressing lock (L2), pull out connector (1)
from becoming too hot, as it causes defor-
toward you.
mation or damage to the connector.
a In the case that even if lock (L2) is
pressed, connector (1) cannot be pulled
out toward you unless part A floats, float
part A with a small flat-head screwdriver
while pressing lock (L2), and then pull out
connector (1) toward you.

3. Perform a continuity test on the connector.After


drying, leave the wiring harness disconnected
and perform a continuity test to check for any
short circuits between pins caused by water.
a After the connector is completely dried,
blow the contact restorer and reassemble
Connection
them.
1. Insert the connector securely until a click is
heard.

Slide, lock type (Type 2) (FRAMATOME-24)


Disconnection
1. Slide down lock (red) (L1).

00-200 24 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


200 Foreword and general information
Handling of electrical equipment SEN06260-00

2. While pressing lock (L2), pull out connector Connection


(1). 1. Insert the connector securely until a click is
heard.

Push lock type (1) (BOSCH-3)


Disconnection
1. While pressing lock (C), pull out connector (3)
in the direction of the arrow.
q 114 series

a Lock (L2) is located in the back of connec-


tor (1).

q 107 series

Connection
1. Insert the connector securely until a click is
heard.

Pull lock type (PACKARD-2)


Disconnection
1. Disconnect the connector (2) by pulling lock a If the lock is located on the underside, use
(B) (on the wiring harness side) of connector flat-head screwdriver [1] since you cannot
(2) outward. insert your fingers.
While pushing up lock (C) of the connector
with flat-head screwdriver [1], pull out con-
nector (3) in the direction of the arrow.

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 00-200 25


200 Foreword and general information
SEN06260-00 Handling of electrical equipment

Connection Example) Injection pressure control valve of


1. Insert the connector securely until a click is supply pump: PCV (SUMITOMO-2)
heard.

Push lock type (2) (SUMITOMO-4)


Disconnection
1. While pressing lock (C), pull out connector (4)
in the direction of the arrow.
Connection
1. Insert the connector securely until a click is
heard.

Example) Speed sensor of supply pump: G


(SUMITOMO-3)
a Pull the connector straight up.

Push lock type (3) (AMP-3)


Disconnection
1. While pressing lock (E), pull out connector (5)
in the direction of the arrow.
Example) Fuel pressure sensor in common
rail: PFUEL etc (AMP-3)

Connection
1. Insert the connector securely until a click is
heard.

00-200 26 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


200 Foreword and general information
Handling of electrical equipment SEN06260-00

Turn-housing type (Round green connector) Handling controller


(CANNON-4) q The electronic circuits for control including the
Disconnection microcomputers are assembled in the control-
1. Turn housing (H1) in the direction of the arrow. ler. These electronic circuits in the controller
a Unlock the connector by turning housing must be handled with care as they control the
(H1). When the lock is release the housing machine.
is felt tight to turn. q Do not place objects on top of the controller.
2. Pull out housing (H1) in the direction of the
arrow.
a Housing (H1) is left on the wiring harness
side.

q Cover the control connectors with tape or a


vinyl bag. Never touch the connector contacts.
q During rainy weather, do not leave the control-
ler in a place where it is exposed to rain.
q Do not place the controller on oil, water, or soil,
Connection or in a place that can be heated to a high tem-
1. Insert the connector to the end while aligning perature even for a short period of time.
its grove to the other. (Place it on a suitable dry stand.)
2. Turn housing (H1) in the direction of the arrow
until it “clicks”.

q Precautions when performing arc welding


When performing arc welding on the machine
body, disconnect all the wiring harness con-
nectors connected to the controller. Put the arc
welding ground to the place close to the weld-
ing point.

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 00-200 27


200 Foreword and general information
SEN06260-00 Handling of electrical equipment

Precautions for troubleshooting electrical cir-


cuits
q Be sure to turn the starting switch to the “OFF”
position before disconnecting or connecting
the connectors.
q Before performing troubleshooting, check all
the related connectors for loose connection.
a Check the related connectors for their per-
formance by disconnecting and connect-
ing them several times.
q Be sure to connect all the disconnected con-
nectors before proceeding to the next step.
a If the starting switch is turned to the “ON”
position with the connectors disconnected,
the failure which is not related to the part
which is actually failed.
q When performing the troubleshooting for the
c i r c u i t ( m e a s u r e m e n t o f v o l ta g e , r e s i s -
tance,continuity, current, etc.), shake the
related wiring harnesses and connectors sev-
eral times and check that the multimeter read-
ing does not change.
a If there is any value change on the multim-
eter, there may be a defective contact in
the circuit.

00-200 28 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


200 Foreword and general information
How to read electric wire code SEN06260-00

How to read electric wire code 1


q In the electrical circuit diagram, material, thickness and color of each electric wire are indicated by sym-
bols. The wire code is helpful in understanding the electrical circuit diagram.
Example) AEX 0.85 L: Indicates blue, heat-resistant, low-voltage wire for automobile, having nominal No. of
0.85

Indicates type of wire by symbol.


Type, symbol, and material of wire are shown in Table 1.
AEX
(Since the use of AV and AVS wires depends on size (nominal No.), their symbols are not indi-
cated on the diagram.)
Indicates size of wire by nominal No.
0.85
Size (Nominal No.) is shown in Table 2.
Indicates color of wire by color code.
L
Color codes are shown in Table 3.

Type, symbol, and material


q AV and AVS are different in thickness and outside diameter of the coating. CAVC has a circular com-
pressed conductor. It differs from AV and AVS in the outside diameter of conductor and thickness of the
coating. And AEX is similar to AV in thickness and outside diameter of the coating but different from AV
and AVS in material of the coating.

(Table 1)
Tempera-
Sym-
Type Conductor Material ture range Example of use
bol
(°C) in use
Low-volt-
For large current wiring
age wire for AV
(nominal No. 5 and above)
automobile
Thin-cover
low-voltage
General wiring
wire for AVS
(nominal No. 3 and lower)
automobile Soft polyvinyl chloride –30 to +60
Annealed
(Type 1)
copper
Thin-cover for elec-
low-voltage tric appli- For mid- to small-size
wire for CAVS ance excavators
automobile (nominal No. 1.25 and lower)
Type 2
Heat-resis-
tant low- (Safety factor:
Heat-resistant crosslinked
voltage wire AEX –50 to +110 Wiring at high-temperature
polyethylene
for automo- place
bile

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 00-200 29


200 Foreword and general information
SEN06260-00 How to read electric wire code

Dimension
(Table 2)

Nominal No. 0.5f (0.5) 0.75f (0.85) 1.25f (1.25) 2f 2 3f 3 5


Number of
strands/Diam- 20/0.18 7/0.32 30/0.18 11/0.32 50/0.18 16/0.32 37/0.26 26/0.32 58/0.26 41/0.32 65/0.32
eter of strand
Conductor Cross-
sectional 0.51 0.56 0.76 0.88 1.27 1.29 1.96 2.09 3.08 3.30 5.23
area (mm2)
d (approx.) 1.0 1.2 1.5 1.9 1.9 2.3 2.4 3.0
AVS Standard 2.0 2.2 2.5 2.9 2.9 3.5 3.6 –
Coating D

AV Standard – – – – – – – 4.6
AEX Standard 2.0 2.2 2.7 3.0 3.1 – 3.8 4.6

Nominal No. 8 15 20 30 40 50 60 85 100


Number of
strands/Diam- 50/0.45 84/0.45 41/0.80 70/0.80 85/0.80 108/0.80 127/0.80 169/0.80 217/0.80
eter of strand
Conductor Cross-
sectional area 7.95 13.36 20.61 35.19 42.73 54.29 63.84 84.96 109.1
(mm2)
d (approx.) 3.7 4.8 6.0 8.0 8.6 9.8 10.4 12.0 13.6
AVS Standard – – – – – – – – –
Coating D

AV Standard 5.5 7.0 8.2 10.8 11.4 13.0 13.6 16.0 17.6
AEX Standard 5.3 7.0 8.2 10.8 11.4 13.0 13.6 16.0 17.6

Nominal No. 0.5f 0.5 0.75f 0.85 1.25f 1.25


Number of
7/round 11/round 16/round
strands/Diam- – – –
compression compression compression
eter of strand
Conductor Cross-
sectional area – 0.56 – 0.88 – 1.29
(mm2)
d (approx.) – 0.9 – 1.1 – 1.4
Coating D

CAVS Standard – 1.6 – 1.8 – 2.1

a “f” of nominal No. denotes flexible”.

00-200 30 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


200 Foreword and general information
How to read electric wire code SEN06260-00

Color codes table

(Table 3)
Color Code Color of wire Color Code Color of wire
B Black LgW Light green & White
Br Brown LgY Light green & Yellow
BrB Brown & Black LR Blue & Red
BrR Brown & Red LW Blue & White
BrW Brown & White LY Blue & Yellow
BrY Brown & Yellow O Orange
Ch Charcoal P Pink
Dg Dark green R Red
G Green RB Red & Black
GB Green & Black RG Red & Green
GL Green & Blue RL Red & Blue
Gr Gray RW Red & White
GR Green & Red RY Red & Yellow
GW Green & White Sb Sky Blue
GY Green & Yellow Y Yellow
L Blue YB Yellow & Black
LB Blue & Black YG Yellow &Green
Lg Light green YL Yellow & Blue
LgB Light green & Black YR Yellow & Red
LgR Light green & Red YW Yellow & White

a Remarks: In a color code consisting of two colors, the first color is the color of the background and the
second color is the color of the marking.
Examples)
GW means that the background is “Green” and marking is “White”.

Types of circuits and color codes

Type of wire AVS, AV, CAVS AEX


Charge R WG – – – – R –
Ground B – – – – – B –
Start R – – – – – R –
Light RW RB RY RG RL – D –
Instrument Y YR YB YG YL YW Y Gr
Signal G GW GR GY GB GL G Br
L LW LR LY LB – L –
Type of
Br BrW BrR BrY BrB – – –
circuit
Lg LgR LgY LgB LgW – – –
O – – – – – – –
Appendix Gr – – – – – – –
P – – – – – – –
Sb – – – – – – –
Dg – – – – – – –
Ch – – – – – – –

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 00-200 31


200 Foreword and general information
SEN06260-00 Precautions when performing operation

Precautions when performing operation 1


q When performing “removal or installation” and “disassembly or assembly” of the components, observe
the following general cautions.

Precautions for removal work


q If the coolant contains antifreeze, dispose of it correctly as chemicals. Do not drain the coolant to the
sewage rashly.
q After disconnecting the hoses or tubes, plug them to prevent dirt or dust from entering.
q When draining oil, prepare a container with sufficient capacity.
q Check the match marks which indicate the installing position, and put match marks on the places where
they seem necessary before removal of the components to prevent any mistake when assembling.
q To prevent any excessive force from being applied to the wiring, always hold the connectors when dis-
connecting the connectors. Do not pull the wires.
q Attach the tags to wires and hoses to show their installing positions to prevent any mistake when install-
ing.
q Check the number and thickness of the shims, and keep them in a safe place.
q When hoisting the components, prepare the slings with sufficient strength.
q When using forcing screws to remove any component, tighten the forcing screws uniformly and alter-
nately.
q Before removing any component, clean the surrounding area and cover the component to prevent any
foreign material from entering after removal.
a Precautions when handling piping during disassembly
Use the plugs indicated below for the pipes disconnected at the disassembly.

Face seal type hoses and tubes


Nominal No. Plug (nut end) Sleeve nut (elbow end)
02 07376-70210 02789-20210
03 07376-70315 02789-20315
04 07376-70422 02789-20422
05 07376-70522 02789-20522
06 07376-70628 02789-20628

Split flange type hoses and tubes


Nominal No. Flange (hose end) Sleeve head (tube end) Split flange
04 07379-00400 07378-10400 07371-30400
05 07379-00500 07378-10500 07371-30500

00-200 32 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


200 Foreword and general information
Precautions when performing operation SEN06260-00

If the part is not under hydraulic pressure, the following corks can be used.
Dimensions
Nominal No. Part Number
D d L
06 07049-00608 6 5 8
08 07049-00811 8 6.5 11
10 07049-01012 10 8.5 12
12 07049-01215 12 10 15
14 07049-01418 14 11.5 18
16 07049-01620 16 13.5 20
18 07049-01822 18 15 22
20 07049-02025 20 17 25
22 07049-02228 22 18.5 28
24 07049-02430 24 20 30
27 07049-02734 27 22.5 34

Precautions for installation work


q Tighten all of the bolts and nuts (sleeve nuts) to the specified torque (KES).
q Install the hoses without twist and interference, and securely fasten the clamps located in-between if
they are.
q Replace all of the gaskets, O-rings, cotter pins, and lock plates with new parts.
q Bend the cotter pins and lock plates securely.
q When applying adhesive, clean and degrease the part, and apply two to three drops of adhesive to the
threaded portion.
q When applying liquid gasket, clean and degrease the surface, and apply it uniformly after making sure
that the surface is free from dirt or damage.
q Clean all of the parts, and correct any damage, dents, burrs, or rust found on them.
q Coat the rotating parts and sliding parts with engine oil.
q Coat the surfaces of the press-fitting parts with molybdenum disulfide lubricant (LM-P).
q After installing the snap ring, check that the snap ring is settled in the ring groove completely.
q When connecting wiring harness connectors, clean the connectors to remove oil, dirt, or water, then
connect them securely.
q Use the eye bolts with no fatigue and deformation and screw them in securely. Match the directions of
the eyes and the hook.
q When installing split flanges, tighten the bolts uniformly and alternately to prevent excessive tightening
on one side.
a When the hydraulic cylinder is used for the first time after reassembly of the hydraulic equipment such
as the hydraulic cylinder, pump, etc. and piping after removing them for repair, be sure to perform air
bleeding of the hydraulic circuit according to the following procedure.
1. Start and run the engine at low idle.
2. Repeat the operation to extend and retract each cylinder of the work equipment to approximately
100 mm before the stroke end four to five times.

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 00-200 33


200 Foreword and general information
SEN06260-00 Precautions when performing operation

3. Operate the hydraulic cylinder three to four times to the end of its stroke.
a After the completion of repair and when operating the machine which is stored long term, perform the air
bleeding with the same procedure as the one described above.

Precautions at the time of completing work


Refilling of coolant, oil and grease
q When the coolant is drained, tighten the drain valve securely, then refill the coolant reservoir with the
coolant Komatsu recommends to the specified level. Start the engine to circulate the coolant in the pip-
ing, and add the coolant to the specified level again.
q When the hydraulic components are removed and installed, refill the oil reservoir with the oil Komatsu
recommends to the specified level. Start the engine to circulate the oil in the piping, and add the oil to
the specified level again.
q If the hydraulic piping or hydraulic equipment is removed, be sure to bleed air from the system after
rebuilding the parts, by referring to “Testing and adjusting”.
q Supply the specified amount of grease to the work equipment parts.

Check of installed condition of cylinder heads and manifolds


q Check the cylinder head and intake and exhaust manifold mountings for looseness.
q If any bolt is loose, retighten it.
a For the tightening torques, see the “Disassembly and assembly”.

Check of engine piping for damage and looseness


Check the piping for damage, the mounting bolts and nuts for looseness, and the
Intake and exhaust
joints for air suction and exhaust gas leakage.
system
If any part is loosely installed or damaged, retighten the bolts or repair the part.
Check the piping for damage, the mounting bolts and nuts for looseness, and the
Cooling system joints for water leakage.
If any part is loosely installed or damaged, retighten the bolts or repair the part.
Check the piping for damage, the mounting bolts and nuts for looseness, and the
Fuel system joints for fuel leakage.
If any part is loosely installed or damaged, retighten the bolts or repair the parts.

Check of KDPF or muffler and exhaust pipe for damage and looseness
q Visually check the KDPF or muffler, exhaust pipe and their mounting parts for a crack and damage. If
any part is damaged, replace it.
q Check the mounting bolts, nuts, and clamps of the KDPF or muffler, exhaust pipe and their mounting
parts for looseness.
If any part is loosely installed, retighten the bolts.

Check of KDPF or muffler function


q Check the KDPF or the muffler for unusual noise comparing to the noise when they are new.If any
unusual noise is heard, repair KDPF or muffler, referring to “Troubleshooting” and “Disassembly and
assembly”.

00-200 34 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


200 Foreword and general information
Practical use of KOMTRAX SEN06260-00

Practical use of KOMTRAX 1


KOMTRAX system transmits various machine information by use of the radio communication and
KOMTRAX operator can refer this information in the office and provide various services to the customers.
When KOMTRAX is installed on the machine, the machine information can be checked through the
KOMTRAX system and the testing and troubleshooting can be performed efficiently.
(KOMTRAX may not be installed on the machine in some countries or areas.)

Merit of using KOMTRAX


q The working place of the machine can be checked in the map on PC.
q Operation information such as service meter reading, operating hours, fuel consumption, occurred cau-
tion and failure code can be checked.
q The hours used and replacement time of consumable parts of the machine such as fuel filter, hydraulic
oil filter, hydraulic oil and engine oil can be checked.
q The information of machine working condition (idling time, traveling time, digging time, relieving time,
etc.) can be checked and the machine operating condition can be presumed with these information.
q Various reports such as “Fuel saving operation support”, “Summary of operation”, etc. can be generated
and utilized as an advice tool for the user and operator.

How to use KOMTRAX practically


With KOMTRAX, following support activities will be available.
1. Quick response to sudden request of repair
1) When receiving a repair request from a user, check the displayed caution and failure code, etc.
through KOMTRAX.
2) Arrange the necessary tools, replacement parts, etc, immediately in accordance with the displayed
failure code.
3) By using the map of KOMTRAX, find the location of the failed machine and visit the customer there.
2. Proactive maintenance
1) Check the service summary screen of KOMTRAX, and find the machine which has high priority fail-
ure code indicated by a red or yellow flag.
2) Check the condition of the machine with the customer and make a plan to visit.
3) Arrange necessary tools, replacement parts, etc, immediately in accordance with the displayed fail-
ure code.
3. Practice of periodic maintenance and periodic inspection service
1) Check the service summary screen of KOMTRAX, and find the machine of which the usage limits
for the consumable parts indicated by red flags are over.
2) Submit an estimate sheet for the consumable parts to be replaced and the labor cost for the
replacement work to the customer.
3) Propose the periodic inspection (PM clinic, etc.) according to the service meter reading.

How to operate KOMTRAX


For the operating method of each screen of KOMTRAX, see “KOMTRAX basic operation manual”.

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 00-200 35


200 Foreword and general information
SEN06260-00 Standard tightening torque table

Standard tightening torque table 1


Table of tightening torque for bolts and nuts
Unless otherwise specified, tighten the metric bolts and nuts to the torque shown in the table below.
1. The following table applies to the bolts in Fig. A.

Thread
Width across flats Tightening torque
diameter
(mm) (mm) (Nm) (kgm)
6 10 (10) 11.8 to 14.7 1.2 to 1.5
8 13 (12) 27 to 34 2.8 to 3.5
10 17 (14) 59 to 74 6.0 to 7.5
12 19 (17) 98 to 123 10.0 to 12.5
14 22 157 to 196 16 to 20
16 24 245 to 309 25 to 31.5
18 27 343 to 427 35 to 43.5
20 30 490 to 608 50 to 62
22 32 662 to 829 67.5 to 84.5
24 36 824 to 1,030 84 to 105
27 41 1,180 to 1,470 120 to 150
30 46 1,520 to 1,910 155 to 195
33 50 1,960 to 2,450 200 to 250
36 55 2,450 to 3,040 250 to 310
39 60 2,890 to 3,630 295 to 370

a Values with ( ) in the “Width across flats” column are for (*) marked bolt (flange bolt) shown in Fig.
A.
2. The following table applies to the bolts in Fig. B.

Thread
Width across flats Tightening torque
diameter
(mm) (mm) (Nm) (kgm)
6 10 5.9 to 9.8 0.6 to 1.0
8 12 13.7 to 23.5 1.4 to 2.4
10 14 34.3 to 46.1 3.5 to 4.7
12 17 74.5 to 90.2 7.6 to 9.2

Fig. A Fig. B

a Values with parentheses are applied to the width across flats of (*) marked bolts (flanged bolts)

00-200 36 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


200 Foreword and general information
Standard tightening torque table SEN06260-00

Table of tightening torque for split flanged bolts


a Unless otherwise specified, tighten the split flange bolt to the torque shown in the table below.

Thread diameter Width across flats Tightening torque


(mm) (mm) (Nm) (kgm)
10 14 59 to 74 6.0 to 7.5
12 17 98 to 123 10.0 to 12.5
16 22 235 to 285 23.5 to 29.5

Table of tightening torque for O-ring boss piping joints


a Unless otherwise specified, tighten the pipe joint for O-ring boss to the torque shown in the table below.

Thread diameter Width across flats Tightening torque (Nm {kgm})


Nominal No.
(mm) mm Range Target
02 14 35 to 63 {3.5 to 6.5} 44 {4.5}
– 18 59 to 98 {6.0 to10.0} 78 {8.0}
03,04 20 Varies depending 84 to 132 {8.5 to13.5} 103 {10.5}
on type of connec-
05,06 24 tor. 128 to 186 {13.0 to19.0} 157 {16.0}
10,12 33 363 to 480 {37.0 to 49.0} 422 {43.0}
14 42 746 to 1,010 {76.0 to 103} 883 {90.0}

Table of tightening torque for O-ring boss plugs


a Unless otherwise specified, tighten the plug for O-ring boss to the torque shown in the table below.

Nominal Thread diameter Width across flats Tightening torque (Nm {kgm})
No. (mm) mm Range Target
08 8 14 5.88 to 8.82 {0.6 to 0.9} 7.35 {0.75}
10 10 17 9.81 to 12.74 {1.0 to 1.3} 11.27 {1.15}
12 12 19 14.7 to 19.6 {1.5 to 2.0} 17.64 {1.8}
14 14 22 19.6 to 24.5 {2.0 to 2.5} 22.54 {2.3}
16 16 24 24.5 to 34.3 {2.5 to 3.5} 29.4 {3.0}
18 18 27 34.3 to 44.1 {3.5 to 4.5} 39.2 {4.0}
20 20 30 44.1 to 53.9 {4.5 to 5.5} 49.0 {5.0}
24 24 32 58.8 to 78.4 {6.0 to 8.0} 68.6 {7.0}
30 30 32 93.1 to 122.5 { 9.5 to 12.5} 107.8 {11.0}
33 33 – 107.8 to 147.0 {11.0 to 15.0} 127.4 {13.0}
36 36 36 127.4 to 176.4 {13.0 to 18.0} 151.9 {15.5}
42 42 – 181.3 to 240.1 {18.5 to 24.5} 210.7 {21.5}
52 52 – 274.4 to 367.5 {28.0 to 37.5} 323.4 {33.0}

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 00-200 37


200 Foreword and general information
SEN06260-00 Standard tightening torque table

Table of tightening torque for hose (taper seal type and face seal type)
a Unless otherwise specified, tighten the hose fittings (taper seal type and face seal type) to the torque
shown in the following table.
a The table is applied to the threads coated with engine oil (wet threads)

Tightening torque (Nm {kgm}) Taper seal Face seal


Width
Nominal Nominal No. –
across Thread root
No. of Thread size threads per
flats Range Target diameter
hose (mm) inch, type of
(mm) (reference)
thread
34 to 54 { 3.5 to 5.5} 44 { 4.5} – 9/16-18UN 14.3
02 19
34 to 63 { 3.5 to 6.5} 44 { 4.5} 14 – –
22 54 to 93 { 5.5 to 9.5} 74 { 7.5} – 11/16-16UN 17.5
03
24 59 to 98 { 6.0 to 10.0} 78 { 8.0} 18 – –
04 27 84 to 132 { 8.5 to 13.5} 103 {10.5} 22 13/16-16UN 20.6
05 32 128 to 186 {13.0 to 19.0} 157 {16.0} 24 1-14UNS 25.4
06 36 177 to 245 {18.0 to 25.0} 216 {22.0} 30 1-3/16-12UN 30.2
(10) 41 177 to 245 {18.0 to 25.0} 216 {22.0} 33 – –
(12) 46 197 to 294 {20.0 to 30.0} 245 {25.0} 36 – –
(14) 55 246 to 343 {25.0 to 35.0} 294 {30.0} 42 – –

Table of tightening torque for face seal joints


a The tightening torque table below applies to the seal joint (sleeve nut type)
a The table is applied to the threads coated with engine oil (wet threads).

Outer Width Tightening torque (Nm {kgm}) Face seal


diameter across Nominal No. – Thread root
of pipe flats Range Target threads per inch, diameter
(mm) (mm) type of thread (Reference)
8 19 14 to 16 {1.4 to 1.6} 15 {1.5} 9/16-18UN 14.3
10 22 24 to 27 {2.4 to 2.7} 25.5 {2.6} 11/16-16UN 17.5
12 24 {27} 43 to 47 {4.4 to 4.8} 45 {4.6} 13/16-16UN 20.6
15 {16} 30 {32} 60 to 68 {6.1 to 6.8} 64 {6.5} 1-14UN 25.4
22 {20} 36 90 to 95 {9.2 to 9.7} 92.5 {9.4} 1-3/16-12UN 30.2

Reference: The face seal joint of the dimension in ( ) is also used, depending on the specification.

00-200 38 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


200 Foreword and general information
Standard tightening torque table SEN06260-00

Tightening torque table for bolts and nuts on 102,107 and 114 series engines
a Unless otherwise specified, tighten the metric threads bolts and nuts used on the 102, 107 and 114
series engines to the torques shown in the following table.

Thread diameter Tightening torque


(mm) (Nm) (kgm)
6 10 ± 2 1.02 ± 0.20
8 24 ± 4 2.45 ± 0.41
10 43 ± 6 4.38 ± 0.61
12 77 ± 12 7.85 ± 1.22
14 — —

Tightening torque table for I-joints on 102,107 and 114 series engines
a Unless otherwise specified, tighten the metric I-joints used on the 102, 107 and 114 series engines to
the torque shown in the following table.

Thread size Tightening torque


(mm) (Nm) (kgm)
6 8±2 0.81 ± 0.20
8 10 ± 2 1.02 ± 0.20
10 12 ± 2 1.22 ± 0.20
12 24 ± 4 2.45 ± 0.41
14 36 ± 5 3.67 ± 0.51

Tightening torque table for tapered screws on 102,107 and 114 series engines
a Unless otherwise specified, tighten the tapered inch thread screws used on the 102, 107 and 114 series
engines to the torques shown in the following table.

Material In cast iron or steel In aluminum


Tightening torque Tightening torque
Thread diameter (inch)
(Nm) (kgm) (Nm) (kgm)
1/16 15 ± 2 1.53 ± 0.20 5±1 0.51 ± 0.10
1/8 20 ± 2 2.04 ± 0.20 15 ± 2 1.53 ± 0.20
1/4 25 ± 3 2.55 ± 0.31 20 ± 2 2.04 ± 0.20
3/8 35 ± 4 3.57 ± 0.41 25 ± 3 2.55 ± 0.31
1/2 55 ± 6 5.61 ± 0.61 35 ± 4 3.57 ± 0.41
3/4 75 ± 8 7.65 ± 0.82 45 ± 5 4.59 ± 0.51

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 00-200 39


200 Foreword and general information
SEN06260-00 List of abbreviation

List of abbreviation 1

q This list of abbreviations includes the abbreviations used in the text of the shop manual for parts, com-
ponents, and functions whose meaning is not immediately clear. The spelling is given in full with an out-
line of the meaning.
q Abbreviations that are used in general society may not be included.
q Special abbreviations which appear infrequently are noted in the text(marked wit a).
q This list of abbreviations consists of two parts. The first part is a list of the abbreviations used in the text
of the manual, and the second part is a list of the abbreviations used in the circuit diagrams.

List of abbreviations used in the shop manual


Purpose of use (major
Abbrevia-
Full Spelling applicable machine (*), Explanation
tion
or equipment/device)
Function with which when the tires skid (wheels
Anti-skid Brake Travel and brake (HD, stop rotating), the brakes are released, and when
ABS
System HM) the wheels start to rotate, the brakes are applied
again.
Automatic Idling
AISS Engine Automatic setting function of idling speed
Setting System
Function that a lever can perform the steering
Advanced
operations, shifting gear speed operation and
AJSS Joystick Steering Steering (WA)
changing direction operation instead of a steering
System
wheel.
Automatic
Function that the retarder works automatically with
Retarder Travel and brake (HD,
ARAC a certain braking force when the accelerator pedal
Accelerator HM)
is released while the machine travels downhill.
Control
Function that the retarder works automatically with
Automatic a certain braking force so that the machine travels
Travel and brake (HD,
ARSC Retarder Speed with the speed not exceeding the speed set by the
HM)
Control operator when the accelerator pedal is released
while the machine travels downhill.
Function with which, when the rear wheels spin on
Automatic Spin Travel and brake (HD, soft ground surfaces, this function automatically
ASR
Regulator HM) uses the optimum braking force to drive both
wheels.
A device that can be fixed onto a machine in order
ATT Attachment Work equipment
to enable it to do different jobs.
Valve that bypasses part of the brake cooling oil to
Brake cooling oil
BCV Brake (HD) reduce the load on the hydraulic pump when the
control valve
retarder is not being used.
Controller Area Communication and One of communication standards that is used in
CAN
Network electronic control the network on the machine
Crankcase Regulator valve that is installed to the KCCV
CDR Depression Engine ventilator It is not used independently and
Regulator described CDR valve.
Closed-center System that can simultaneously actuate multiple
CLSS Load Sensing Oil pressure actuators regardless of the load (provides better
System combined operation comparing to OLSS).
Function to maintain optimum fuel injection
Common Rail amount and fuel injection timing by using engine
CRI Engine
Injection controller to perform electronic control of supply
pump, common rail, and injector.

00-200 40 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


200 Foreword and general information
List of abbreviation SEN06260-00

Purpose of use (major


Abbrevia-
Full Spelling applicable machine (*), Explanation
tion
or equipment/device)
Electronic control device that uses the signals
Electronic Control Electronic control from the sensors on the machine to indicate the
ECM
Module system optimum actuation to the actuators . (Same as
ECU)
Proportional electromagnetic valve that gradually
Electronic Control Transmission (D, HD,
ECMV increases oil pressure to engage clutch and
Modulation Valve WA, etc.)
reduces transmission shock.
Electronically
System that ensures smooth high-speed travel by
Controlled
ECSS Travel (WA) using hydraulic spring effect of accumulator to
Suspension
absorb vibration of machine during travel
System
Electronic control device that uses the signals
Electronic Control Electronic control from the sensors on the machine to indicate the
ECU
Unit system optimum actuation to the actuators. (Same as
ECM)
Function to recirculate part of exhaust gas to
Exhaust Gas combustion chamber in order to reduce
EGR Engine
Recirculation combustion temperature and to control emission
of NOx.
Equipment System that allows data (filter, oil replacement
Management interval, malfunctions on machine, failure code,
EMMS Machine monitor
Monitoring and failure history) from each sensor on the
System machine to be checked on monitor.
Electromagnetic
Electromagnetic proportional control Mechanism
EPC Proportional Oil pressure
that actuator works in proportion to current
Control
Falling Object Structure that protects operator's head from falling
FOPS Protective Cab and canopy objects. (Structure to protect operator)
Structure Performance standardized in ISO 3449
Forward-Neutral-
F-N-R Operation Forward - NEUTRAL - REVERSE
Reverse
Communication Global Positioning System Satellite positioning
Global Positioning
GPS (KOMTRAX system that is used to determine the current
System
§KOMTRAX Plus) location on the earth
Steering function that uses a combination of
Hydrostatic hydraulic motor and bevel shaft to control
HSS Steering (D)
Steering System difference in travel speed of right and left tracks to
turn machine without using steering clutch.
Hydraulic transmission system that uses a
Hydro Static
HST Transmission (D, WA) combination of hydraulic pump and hydraulic
Transmission
motor to shift gear steplessly without using gears.
Valve that adjusts fuel intake amount at inlet port
Inlet Metering
IMA Engine of pump in order to control fuel discharge amount
Actuator
of supply pump. Same meaning as IMV
Valve adjusting fuel intake amount at inlet port of
Inlet Metering
IMV Engine pump in order to control fuel discharge amount of
Valve
supply pump. Described IMV (IMA)
Komatsu Closed This mechanism separates oil in blowby gas and
KCCV Crankcase Engine returns it to the intake side to afterburn it there. It
Ventilation primarily consists of filters.

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 00-200 41


200 Foreword and general information
SEN06260-00 List of abbreviation

Purpose of use (major


Abbrevia-
Full Spelling applicable machine (*), Explanation
tion
or equipment/device)
Komatsu
This filter is used to capture soot in exhaust gas.
KCSF Catalyzed Soot Engine
It is built in to KDPF.
Filter
Komatsu Diesel The catalyst used for purifying exhaust gas.
KDOC Engine
Oxidation Catalyst It is built in to KDPF.
This component with built-in KDOC (catalyst) and
Komatsu Diesel KCSF purifies exhaust gas. Part building in (soot-
KDPF Engine
Particulate Filter capturing filter)
It is installed in place of the currently used muffler.
Function that recovers the drive force of the
wheels by braking automatically with the optimum
Komatsu Traction Travel and brake (HM
KTCS force and at the same time activates the inter-axle
Control System system)
differential lock when the wheels idle while the
machine travels on the soft ground road.
Komatsu Variable
The turbocharger on which the cross-section area
KVGT Geometry Engine
of the exhaust passage is made variable.
Turbocharger
Liquid Display Image display equipment such as
Liquid Crystal
LCD Machine monitor the monitor which assembles in the liquid crystal
Display
element.
Light Emitting Diode Semi-conductor element that
Light Emitting
LED Electronic parts emits light when the voltage is applied in the
Diode
normal direction.
Local Interconnect Communication and One of communication standards that is used in
LIN
Network electronic control the network on the machine
Function that detects differential pressure of pump
LS Load Sensing Oil pressure
and controls discharge amount according to load.
Low Voltage
Communication and One of communication standards that is used in
LVDS Differential
electronic control the network on the machine
Signaling
It means the intake air flow of the engine. It is not
used independently but used together with the
MAF Mass Air Flow Engine
sensor. The mass air flow sensor may be called
MAF sensor.
Multimedia Service that allows transmission and reception of
MMS Messaging Communication short messages consisting of characters or voice
Service or images between cell phones.
Device actuated to open electric or hydraulic
NC Normally Closed Electric and hydraulic
circuits that are normally closed if not actuated.
Device actuated to close electric or hydraulic
NO Normally Open Electric and hydraulic
circuits that are normally open if not actuated.
Open-center Load Hydraulic system that can operate multiple
OLSS Oil pressure
Sensing System actuators at the same time, regardless of the load.
Pressure
PC Oil pressure A function used to correct oil pressure.
Compensation
System in which a controller instantly analyses
Palm command data from each lever, pedal, and dial, and
PCCS Steering (D)
control system performs optimum electronic control of the engine
and transmission.
Valve installed at inlet port of pump to adjust fuel
Pre-stroke Control
PCV Engine intake amount in order to control fuel discharge
Valve
amount of supply pump.

00-200 42 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


200 Foreword and general information
List of abbreviation SEN06260-00

Purpose of use (major


Abbrevia-
Full Spelling applicable machine (*), Explanation
tion
or equipment/device)
Proportional Proportional pressure control Mechanism that
PPC Oil pressure
Pressure Control actuator works in proportion to hydraulic pressure
Piston Pump and Oil pressure
PPM Piston pump and motor.
Motor (D, PC, etc.)
PTO Power Take Off Power transmission Power take-off mechanism
Power Tilt and Function that performs hydraulic control of the tilt
PTP Work equipment (D)
power Pitch dozer and pitch of the bulldozer blade.
Structure that protects operator fastening seat belt
Roll-Over from being crushed when machine tips over
ROPS Protective Cab and canopy (Structure to protect operator when machine tips
Structure over)
Performance standardized in ISO 3471
Abbreviation for “International system of units”
International unit
SI Unit Unit system that is employed worldwide, and “one
system
unit against one factor”
Actuator that moves a part with a movable iron
SOL Solenoid Electric core in the coil (solenoid), which is moved by
energizing the coil.
TWV Two Way Valve Hydraulic and electric Solenoid valve that switches the direction of flow.

*1: Code for applicable machine family


D: Bulldozer
HD: Dump truck
HM: Articulated dump truck
PC: Hydraulic excavator
WA: Wheel loader

List of abbreviations used in the circuit diagrams

Abbreviation Actual word spelled out


A/C Air Conditioner
A/D Analogue-to-Digital
A/M Air Mix Damper
ACC Accessory
ADD Additional
AUX Auxiliary
BR Battery Relay
CW Clockwise
CCW Counter Clockwise
ECU Electronic Control Unit
ECM Electronic Control Module
ENG Engine
EXGND External Ground
F.G. Frame Ground
GND Ground
IMA Inlet Metering Actuator
NC No Connection
S/T
Steering
STRG
SIG Signal

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 00-200 43


200 Foreword and general information
SEN06260-00 List of abbreviation

Abbreviation Actual word spelled out


SOL Solenoid
STD Standard
OPT
Option (if equipped)
OP
PRESS Pressure
SPEC Specification
SW Switch
TEMP Temperature
T/C Torque Converter
T/M Transmission

00-200 44 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


200 Foreword and general information
Conversion table SEN06260-00

Conversion table 1
Method of using the conversion table
q The unit conversion table enables the simple conversion in the figures between the different units. For
further details of the method of use of the conversion table, see the examples given below.
Example: Method of using the conversion table to convert a unit from millimeters to inches

Conversion of 55 mm into inches


1. Locate the number 50 in the vertical column at the left side, take this as (A), and then draw a horizontal
line from (A).
2. Locate the number 5 in the row across the top, take this as (B), then draw a vertical line down from (B).
3. Take the point where the two lines cross as (C). This point (C) gives the value when converting the unit
from millimeters to inches. Therefore, 55 mm = 2.165 in.

Conversion of 550 mm into inches


1. The number 550 does not appear in the table, so divide it by 10 (move the decimal point one place to
the left) to get 55 mm.
2. Then convert 55 mm to 2.165 in by the same procedure as above.
3. The original value (550 mm) was divided by 10, so multiply 2.165 inches by 10 (move the decimal point
one place to the right) to get the original value. This gives 550 mm = 21.65 in. Therefore, 550 mm =
21.65 in.

Millimeters to inches (B)


1 mm = 0.03937 in
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 0 0.039 0.079 0.118 0.157 0.197 0.236 0.276 0.315 0.354
10 0.394 0.433 0.472 0.512 0.551 0.591 0.630 0.669 0.709 0.748
20 0.787 0.827 0.866 0.906 0.945 0.984 1.024 1.063 1.102 1.142
30 1.181 1.220 1.260 1.299 1.339 1.378 1.417 1.457 1.496 1.536
40 1.575 1.614 1.654 1.693 1.732 1.772 1.811 1.850 1.890 1.929
(C)
50 1.969 2.008 2.047 2.087 2.126 2.165 2.205 2.244 2.283 2.323
(A)
60 2.362 2.402 2.441 2.480 2.520 2.559 2.598 2.638 2.677 2.717
70 2.756 2.795 2.835 2.874 2.913 2.953 2.992 3.032 3.071 3.110
80 3.150 3.189 3.228 3.268 3.307 3.346 3.386 3.425 3.465 3.504
90 3.543 3.583 3.622 3.661 3.701 3.740 3.780 3.819 3.858 3.898

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 00-200 45


200 Foreword and general information
SEN06260-00 Conversion table

Millimeters to inches
1 mm = 0.03937 in
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 0 0.039 0.079 0.118 0.157 0.197 0.236 0.276 0.315 0.354
10 0.394 0.433 0.472 0.512 0.551 0.591 0.630 0.669 0.709 0.748
20 0.787 0.827 0.866 0.906 0.945 0.984 1.024 1.063 1.102 1.142
30 1.181 1.220 1.260 1.299 1.339 1.378 1.417 1.457 1.496 1.536
40 1.575 1.614 1.654 1.693 1.732 1.772 1.811 1.850 1.890 1.929
50 1.969 2.008 2.047 2.087 2.126 2.165 2.205 2.244 2.283 2.323
60 2.362 2.402 2.441 2.480 2.520 2.559 2.598 2.638 2.677 2.717
70 2.756 2.795 2.835 2.874 2.913 2.953 2.992 3.032 3.071 3.110
80 3.150 3.189 3.228 3.268 3.307 3.346 3.386 3.425 3.465 3.504
90 3.543 3.583 3.622 3.661 3.701 3.740 3.780 3.819 3.858 3.898

Kilogram to pound
1 kg = 2.2046 lb
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 0 2.20 4.41 6.61 8.82 11.02 13.23 15.43 17.64 19.84
10 22.05 24.25 26.46 28.66 30.86 33.07 35.27 37.48 39.68 41.89
20 44.09 46.30 48.50 50.71 51.91 55.12 57.32 59.53 61.73 63.93
30 66.14 68.34 70.55 72.75 74.96 77.16 79.37 81.57 83.78 85.98
40 88.18 90.39 92.59 94.80 97.00 99.21 101.41 103.62 105.82 108.03
50 110.23 112.44 114.64 116.85 119.05 121.25 123.46 125.66 127.87 130.07
60 132.28 134.48 136.69 138.89 141.10 143.30 145.51 147.71 149.91 152.12
70 154.32 156.53 158.73 160.94 163.14 165.35 167.55 169.76 171.96 174.17
80 176.37 178.57 180.78 182.98 185.19 187.39 189.60 191.80 194.01 196.21
90 198.42 200.62 202.83 205.03 207.24 209.44 211.64 213.85 216.05 218.26

l to U.S. Gallons
1 l = 0.2642 U.S.Gal
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 0 0.264 0.528 0.793 1.057 1.321 1.585 1.849 2.113 2.378
10 2.642 2.906 3.170 3.434 3.698 3.963 4.227 4.491 4.755 5.019
20 5.283 5.548 5.812 6.076 6.340 6.604 6.869 7.133 7.397 7.661
30 7.925 8.189 8.454 8.718 8.982 9.246 9.510 9.774 10.039 10.303
40 10.567 10.831 11.095 11.359 11.624 11.888 12.152 12.416 12.680 12.944
50 13.209 13.473 13.737 14.001 14.265 14.529 14.795 15.058 15.322 15.586
60 15.850 16.115 16.379 16.643 16.907 17.171 17.435 17.700 17.964 18.228
70 18.492 18.756 19.020 19.285 19.549 19.813 20.077 20.341 20.605 20.870
80 21.134 21.398 21.662 21.926 22.190 22.455 22.719 22.983 23.247 23.511
90 23.775 24.040 24.304 24.568 24.832 25.096 25.361 25.625 25.889 26.153

00-200 46 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


200 Foreword and general information
Conversion table SEN06260-00

l to U.K. Gallons
1 l = 0.21997 U.K.Gal
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 0 0.220 0.440 0.660 0.880 1.100 1.320 1.540 1.760 1.980
10 2.200 2.420 2.640 2.860 3.080 3.300 3.520 3.740 3.950 4.179
20 4.399 4.619 4.839 5.059 5.279 5.499 5.719 5.939 6.159 6.379
30 6.599 6.819 7.039 7.259 7.479 7.699 7.919 8.139 8.359 8.579
40 8.799 9.019 9.239 9.459 9.679 9.899 10.119 10.339 10.559 10.778
50 10.998 11.281 11.438 11.658 11.878 12.098 12.318 12.528 12.758 12.978
60 13.198 13.418 13.638 13.858 14.078 14.298 14.518 14.738 14.958 15.178
70 15.398 15.618 15.838 16.058 16.278 16.498 16.718 16.938 17.158 17.378
80 17.598 17.818 18.037 18.257 18.477 18.697 18.917 19.137 19.357 19.577
90 19.797 20.017 20.237 20.457 20.677 20.897 21.117 21.337 21.557 21.777

kgm to ft.lb
1 kgm = 7.233 ft.lb
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 0 7.2 14.5 21.7 28.9 36.2 43.4 50.6 57.9 65.1
10 72.3 79.6 86.8 94.0 101.3 108.5 115.7 123.0 130.2 137.4
20 144.7 151.9 159.1 166.4 173.6 180.8 188.1 195.3 202.5 209.8
30 217.0 224.2 231.5 238.7 245.9 253.2 260.4 267.6 274.9 282.1
40 289.3 296.6 303.8 311.0 318.3 325.5 332.7 340.0 347.2 354.4
50 361.7 368.9 376.1 383.4 390.6 397.8 405.1 412.3 419.5 426.8
60 434.0 441.2 448.5 455.7 462.9 470.2 477.4 484.6 491.8 499.1
70 506.3 513.5 520.8 528.0 535.2 542.5 549.7 556.9 564.2 571.4
80 578.6 585.9 593.1 600.3 607.6 614.8 622.0 629.3 636.5 643.7
90 651.0 658.2 665.4 672.7 679.9 687.1 694.4 701.6 708.8 716.1
100 723.3 730.5 737.8 745.0 752.2 759.5 766.7 773.9 781.2 788.4
110 795.6 802.9 810.1 817.3 824.6 831.8 839.0 846.3 853.5 860.7
120 868.0 875.2 882.4 889.7 896.9 904.1 911.4 918.6 925.8 933.1
130 940.3 947.5 954.8 962.0 969.2 976.5 983.7 990.9 998.2 1005.4
140 1012.6 1019.9 1027.1 1034.3 1041.5 1048.8 1056.0 1063.2 1070.5 1077.7
150 1084.9 1092.2 1099.4 1106.6 1113.9 1121.1 1128.3 1135.6 1142.8 1150.0
160 1157.3 1164.5 1171.7 1179.0 1186.2 1193.4 1200.7 1207.9 1215.1 1222.4
170 1129.6 1236.8 1244.1 1251.3 1258.5 1265.8 1273.0 1280.1 1287.5 1294.7
180 1301.9 1309.2 1316.4 1323.6 1330.9 1338.1 1345.3 1352.6 1359.8 1367.0
190 1374.3 1381.5 1388.7 1396.0 1403.2 1410.4 1417.7 1424.9 1432.1 1439.4

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 00-200 47


200 Foreword and general information
SEN06260-00 Conversion table

kg/cm2 to lb/in2
1 kg/cm2 = 14.2233 lb/in2
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 0 14.2 28.4 42.7 56.9 71.1 85.3 99.6 113.8 128.0
10 142.2 156.5 170.7 184.9 199.1 213.4 227.6 241.8 256.0 270.2
20 284.5 298.7 312.9 327.1 341.4 355.6 369.8 384.0 398.3 412.5
30 426.7 440.9 455.1 469.4 483.6 497.8 512.0 526.3 540.5 554.7
40 568.9 583.2 597.4 611.6 625.8 640.1 654.3 668.5 682.7 696.9
50 711.2 725.4 739.6 753.8 768.1 782.3 796.5 810.7 825.0 839.2
60 853.4 867.6 881.8 896.1 910.3 924.5 938.7 953.0 967.2 981.4
70 995.6 1,010 1,024 1,038 1,053 1,067 1,081 1,095 1,109 1,124
80 1,138 1,152 1,166 1,181 1,195 1,209 1,223 1,237 1,252 1,266
90 1,280 1,294 1,309 1,323 1,337 1,351 1,365 1,380 1,394 1,408
100 1,422 1,437 1,451 1,465 1,479 1,493 1,508 1,522 1,536 1,550
110 1,565 1,579 1,593 1,607 1,621 1,636 1,650 1,664 1,678 1,693
120 1,707 1,721 1,735 1,749 1,764 1,778 1,792 1,806 1,821 1,835
130 1,849 1,863 1,877 1,892 1,906 1,920 1,934 1,949 1,963 1,977
140 1,991 2,005 2,020 2,034 2,048 2,062 2,077 2,091 2,105 2,119
150 2,134 2,148 2,162 2,176 2,190 2,205 2,219 2,233 2,247 2,262
160 2,276 2,290 2,304 2,318 2,333 2,347 2,361 2,375 2,389 2,404
170 2,418 2,432 2,446 2,460 2,475 2,489 2,503 2,518 2,532 2,546
180 2,560 2,574 2,589 2,603 2,617 2,631 2,646 2,660 2,674 2,688
190 2,702 2,717 2,731 2,745 2,759 2,773 2,788 2,802 2,816 2,830
200 2,845 2,859 2,873 2,887 2,901 2,916 2,930 2,944 2,958 2,973
210 2,987 3,001 3,015 3,030 3,044 3,058 3,072 3,086 3,101 3,115
220 3,129 3,143 3,158 3,172 3,186 3,200 3,214 3,229 3,243 3,257
230 3,271 3,286 3,300 3,314 3,328 3,343 3,357 3,371 3,385 3,399
240 3,414 3,428 3,442 3,456 3,470 3,485 3,499 3,513 3,527 3,542

00-200 48 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


200 Foreword and general information
Conversion table SEN06260-00

Temperature
Conversion of Fahrenheit to Celsius
q A simple way to convert a Fahrenheit temperature reading into a Celsius temperature reading or vice
versa is to see the number in the center column of the following table. The figures on the following table
show the temperatures in both Fahrenheit and Celsius.
q When converting from Fahrenheit to Celsius degrees, consider the center column to be a table of Fahr-
enheit temperatures and read the corresponding Celsius temperature in the column at the left.
q When converting from Celsius to Fahrenheit degrees, consider the center column to be a table of Cel-
sius values, and read the corresponding Fahrenheit temperature on the right.

1°C = 33.8°F
°C °F °C °F °C °F °C °F
–40.4 –40 –40.0 –11.7 11 51.8 7.8 46 114.8 27.2 81 177.8
–37.2 –35 –31.0 –11.1 12 53.6 8.3 47 116.6 27.8 82 179.6
–34.4 –30 –22.0 –10.6 13 55.4 8.9 48 118.4 28.3 83 181.4
–31.7 –25 –13.0 –10.0 14 57.2 9.4 49 120.2 28.9 84 183.2
–28.9 –20 –4.0 –9.4 15 59.0 10.0 50 122.0 29.4 85 185.0
–28.3 –19 –2.2 –8.9 16 60.8 10.6 51 123.8 30.0 86 186.8
–27.8 –18 –0.4 –8.3 17 62.6 11.1 52 125.6 30.6 87 188.6
–27.2 –17 1.4 –7.8 18 64.4 11.7 53 127.4 31.1 88 190.4
–26.7 –16 3.2 –7.2 19 66.2 12.2 54 129.2 31.7 89 192.2
–26.1 –15 5.0 –6.7 20 68.0 12.8 55 131.0 32.2 90 194.0
–25.6 –14 6.8 –6.1 21 69.8 13.3 56 132.8 32.8 91 195.8
–25.0 –13 8.6 –5.6 22 71.6 13.9 57 134.6 33.3 92 197.6
–24.4 –12 10.4 –5.0 23 73.4 14.4 58 136.4 33.9 93 199.4
–23.9 –11 12.2 –4.4 24 75.2 15.0 59 138.2 34.4 94 201.2
–23.3 –10 14.0 –3.9 25 77.0 15.6 60 140.0 35.0 95 203.0
–22.8 –9 15.8 –3.3 26 78.8 16.1 61 141.8 35.6 96 204.8
–22.2 –8 17.6 –2.8 27 80.6 16.7 62 143.6 36.1 97 206.6
–21.7 –7 19.4 –2.2 28 82.4 17.2 63 145.4 36.7 98 208.4
–21.1 –6 21.2 –1.7 29 84.2 17.8 64 147.2 37.2 99 210.2
–20.6 –5 23.0 –1.1 30 86.0 18.3 65 149.0 37.8 100 212.0
–20.0 –4 24.8 –0.6 31 87.8 18.9 66 150.8 40.6 105 221.0
–19.4 –3 26.6 0 32 89.6 19.4 67 152.6 43.3 110 230.0
–18.9 –2 28.4 0.6 33 91.4 20.0 68 154.4 46.1 115 239.0
–18.3 –1 30.2 1.1 34 93.2 20.6 69 156.2 48.9 120 248.0
–17.8 0 32.0 1.7 35 95.0 21.1 70 158.0 51.7 125 257.0
–17.2 1 33.8 2.2 36 96.8 21.7 71 159.8 54.4 130 266.0
–16.7 2 35.6 2.8 37 98.6 22.2 72 161.6 57.2 135 275.0
–16.1 3 37.4 3.3 38 100.4 22.8 73 163.4 60.0 140 284.0
–15.6 4 39.2 3.9 39 102.2 23.3 74 165.2 62.7 145 293.0
–15.0 5 41.0 4.4 40 104.0 23.9 75 167.0 65.6 150 302.0
–14.4 6 42.8 5.0 41 105.8 24.4 76 168.8 68.3 155 311.0
–13.9 7 44.6 5.6 42 107.6 25.0 77 170.6 71.1 160 320.0
–13.3 8 46.4 6.1 43 109.4 25.6 78 172.4 73.9 165 329.0
–12.8 9 48.2 6.7 44 111.2 26.1 79 174.2 76.7 170 338.0
–12.2 10 50.0 7.2 45 113.0 26.7 80 176.0 79.4 175 347.0

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 00-200 49


SEN06260-00

PC300-8M0, PC300LC-8M0, PC350-8M0, PC350LC-8M0 HYDRAULIC EXCAVATOR


Form No. SEN06260-00

© 2013 KOMATSU
All Rights Reserved
Printed in Japan 01-13 (01)

00-200 50
SEN06262-00

HYDRAULIC EXCAVATOR 1SHOP MANUAL

PC300-8M0
PC300LC-8M0
PC350-8M0
PC350LC-8M0

Machine model Serial number


PC300-8M0 80001 and up
PC300LC-8M0 80001 and up
PC350-8M0 80001 and up
PC350LC-8M0 80001 and up

01 Specification 1
100 Specification and technical data
Specification dimension drawings................................................................................................................... 2
Specifications.................................................................................................................................................. 4
Weight table.................................................................................................................................................. 10
Table of fuel, coolant and lubricants ............................................................................................................. 12

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 01-100 1


01 Specification
SEN06262-00 Specification dimension drawings

Specification dimension drawings 1


Dimensions 1

Item Unit PC300-8M0 PC300LC-8M0 PC350-8M0 PC350LC-8M0


A Overall length mm 11,150 11,150 11,150 11,150
B Overall height mm 3,250 3,250 3,250 3,250
C Overall width mm 3,190 3,190 3,190 3,190
D Shoe width mm 600 600 600 600
E Cab height mm 3,110 3,110 3,110 3,110
F Tail swing radius mm 3,450 3,450 3,450 3,450
G Overall track length mm 4,625 4,955 4,625 4,955
Length of track on
H mm 3,700 4,030 3,700 4,030
ground
J Min. ground clearance mm 498 498 498 498

01-100 2 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


01 Specification
Specification dimension drawings SEN06262-00

1
Working ranges 1

Item Unit PC300-8M0 PC300LC-8M0 PC350-8M0 PC350LC-8M0


A Max. digging reach mm 11,100 11,100 11,100 11,100
B Max. digging depth mm 7,380 7,380 7,380 7,380
C Max. digging height mm 10,100 10,100 10,100 10,100
Max. vertical wall
D mm 6,400 6,400 6,400 6,400
digging depth
Max. dumping
E mm 7,050 7,050 7,050 7,050
height
F Min. dumping height mm 2,640 2,640 2,640 2,640
Max. reach at
G mm 10,920 10,920 10,920 10,920
ground level

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 01-100 3


01 Specification
SEN06262-00 Specifications

Specifications 1

PC300-8M0, PC300LC-8M0

Machine model PC300-8M0 PC300LC-8M0


Serial number 80001 and up
Bucket capacity m 3
1.4 1.4
Operating weight kg 31,100 31,600
Max. digging depth mm 7,380 7,380
Max. vertical wall digging
Working range

mm 6,400 6,400
depth
Max. digging radius mm 11,100 11,100
Max. reach at ground level mm 10,920 10,920
Max. digging height mm 10,100 10,100
Performance

Max. dumping height mm 7,050 7,050


Max. digging force
211.8 {21,600} 211.8 {21,600}
(When power max. function is kN {kg}
(226.5 {23,100}) (226.5 {23,100})
turned on)
Swing speed min-1 {rpm} 9.5 {9.5] 9.5 {9.5}
Swing operation max. slope angle deg. 21 21
Travel speed km/h Lo: 3.2 Mi: 4.5 Hi: 5.5 Lo: 3.2 Mi: 4.5 Hi: 5.5
Gradeability deg. 35 35
Ground pressure kPa {kg/cm } 2
62.9 {0.64} 59.0 {0.60}
Overall length mm 11,150 11,150
Overall width mm 3,190 3,190
Overall crawler width mm 3,190 3,190
Overall height (During transporta-
mm 3,250 3,250
tion)
Machine body overall height mm 3,110 3,110
Ground clearance of upper struc-
mm 1,185 1,185
ture bottom
Dimensions

Min. ground clearance mm 498 498


Tail swing radius mm 3,450 3,450
Work equipment minimum swing
mm 4,435 4,435
radius
Top height at minimum swing
mm 8,520 8,520
radius of work equipment
Length of track on ground mm 3,700 4,030
Track gauge mm 2,590 2,590
Cab height mm 3,110 3,110
Width of standard shoe mm 600 600

01-100 4 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


01 Specification
Specifications SEN06262-00

Machine model PC300-8M0 PC300LC-8M0


Serial number 80001 and up
Model SAA6D114E-3
4-cycle, water-cooled in-line, direct injection with
Type
turbocharger and air-cooled aftercooler
Number of cylinders – bore x
mm 6-114x135
stroke
Piston displacement l {cc} 8.27 {8,270}
Rated horsepower
q SAE J1995 [gross] 194 {260}/1,950 {1,950}
KW {HP}/
q ISO 14396 187 {250}/1,950 {1,950}
min-1 {rpm}
q ISO 9249/SAE J1349 194 {260}/1,950 {1,950}
Performance
Engine

[net]
Nm {kgm}/
Max. torque 1,109 {113.1}/1,450 {1,450}
min-1 {rpm}
Max. speed with no load min-1 {rpm} 2,050 {2,050}
-1
Min. speed with no load min {rpm} 1,000 {1,000}
g/kWh
Min. fuel consumption ratio 205 {151}
{g/HPh}
Starting motor 24 V, 7.5 kW
Alternator 24 V, 60 A
Battery 12 V, 126 Ah x 2
Radiator model CF90-4
Carrier roller 2 on one side
Undercarriage

Track roller 7 on one side 8 on one side


Assembly-type triple Assembly-type triple
Track shoe grosser grosser
45 on one side 48 on one side

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 01-100 5


01 Specification
SEN06262-00 Specifications

Machine model PC300-8M0 PC300LC-8M0


Serial number 80001 and up
Type and numbers HPV125+125, Variable displacement piston type: 2
Swing motor Travel motor Control valve Hydraulic pump

Delivery l/min 267.5 x 2

MPa
Set pressure 37.8 {380}
{kg/cm2}

Type and numbers 6-spool + 1-spool type: 1

Operating method Hydraulic

HMV160ADT-2, piston type: 2


Type and numbers
(with brake valve and parking brake)
Hydraulic system

KMF160ABE-5, piston type: 1


(with safety valve, shaft brake and reverse prevention
Type and numbers valve)
KMF160AB-5, piston type: 1
(with safety valve and shaft brake)
Boom (*1) Arm (*1) (*2) Bucket
Double acting Double acting Double acting
Hydraulic cylinder

Type
piston piston piston
Cylinder inner diameter mm 140 160 140
Piston rod diameter mm 100 110 100
Stroke mm 1,480 1,825 1,285
Max. pin-to-pin distance mm 3,525 4,255 3,155
Min. pin-to-pin distance mm 2,045 2,430 1,870
Hydraulic tank Box-shaped, closed type
Hydraulic oil filter Tank return side
Hydraulic oil cooler CF91-1 (Air-cooling type)
*1: Cushion is provided on head side
*2: Cushion is provided on bottom side

01-100 6 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


01 Specification
Specifications SEN06262-00

PC350-8M0, PC350LC-8M0

Machine model PC350-8M0 PC350LC-8M0


Serial number 80001 and up
Bucket capacity m 3
1.4 1.4
Operating weight kg 32,600 33,660
Max. digging depth mm 7,380 7,380
Max. vertical wall digging
Working range

mm 6,400 6,400
depth
Max. digging radius mm 11,100 11,100
Max. reach at ground level mm 10,920 10,920
Max. digging height mm 10,100 10,100
Performance

Max. dumping height mm 7,050 7,050


Max. digging force
212.8 {21,700} 212.8 {21,700}
(When power max. function is kN {kg}
(227.5 {23,200}) (227.5 {23,200})
turned on)
Swing speed min-1{rpm} 9.5 9.5
Swing operation max. slope angle deg. 18 18
Travel speed km/h Lo: 3.2 Mi: 4.5 Hi: 5.5 Lo: 3.2 Mi: 4.5 Hi: 5.5
Gradeability deg. 35 35
Ground pressure kPa{kg/cm } 2
65.9 {0.67} 62.9 {0.64}
Overall length mm 11,150 11,150
Overall width mm 3,190 3,190
Overall crawler width mm 3,190 3,190
Overall height (During transporta-
mm 3,250 3,250
tion)
Machine body overall height mm 3,110 3,110
Ground clearance of upper struc-
mm 1,185 1,185
ture bottom
Dimensions

Min. ground clearance mm 498 498


Tail swing radius mm 3,450 3,450
Work equipment minimum swing
mm 4,435 4,435
radius
Top height at minimum swing
mm 8,520 8,520
radius of work equipment
Length of track on ground mm 3,700 4,030
Track gauge mm 2,590 2,590
Cab height mm 3,110 3,110
Width of standard shoe mm 600 600

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 01-100 7


01 Specification
SEN06262-00 Specifications

Machine model PC350-8M0 PC350LC-8M0


Serial number 80001 and up
Model SAA6D114E-3
4-cycle, water-cooled in-line, direct injection with
Type
turbocharger and air-cooled aftercooler
Number of cylinders – bore x
mm 6-114x135
stroke
Piston displacement l {cc} 8.27 {8,270}
Rated horsepower
q SAE J1995 [gross] 194 {260}/1,950 {1,950}
KW {HP}/
q ISO 14396 187 {250}/1,950 {1,950}
min-1 {rpm}
q ISO 9249/SAE J1349 194 {260}/1,950 {1,950}
Performance
Engine

[net]
Nm {kgm}/
Max. torque 1,109 {113.1}/1,450 {1,450}
min-1 {rpm}
Max. speed with no load min-1 {rpm} 2,050 {2,050}
-1
Min. speed with no load min {rpm} 1,000 {1,000}
g/kWh
Min. fuel consumption ratio 205 {151}
{g/HPh}
Starting motor 24 V, 7.5 kW
Alternator 24 V, 60 A
Battery 12 V, 126 Ah x 2
Radiator model CF90-4
Carrier roller 2 on one side
Undercarriage

Track roller 7 on one side 8 on one side


Assembly-type triple Assembly-type triple
Track shoe grosser grosser
45 on one side 48 on one side

01-100 8 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


01 Specification
Specifications SEN06262-00

Machine model PC350-8M0 PC350LC-8M0


Serial number 80001 and up
Type and numbers HPV125+125, Variable displacement piston type: 2
Swing motor Travel motor Control valve Hydraulic pump

Delivery l/min 267.5 x 2

MPa
Set pressure 37.8 {380}
{kg/cm2}

Type and numbers 6-spool + 1-spool type 1

Operating method Hydraulic

HMV160ADT-2, piston type: 2


Type and numbers
(with brake valve and parking brake)
Hydraulic system

KMF160ABE-5, piston type: 1


(with safety valve, shaft brake and reverse prevention
Type and numbers valve)
KMF160AB-5, piston type: 1
(with safety valve and shaft brake)
Boom (*1) Arm (*1) (*2) Bucket
Double acting Double acting Double acting
Hydraulic cylinder

Type
piston piston piston
Cylinder inner diameter mm 140 160 140
Piston rod diameter mm 100 110 110
Stroke mm 1,480 1,825 1,825
Max. pin-to-pin distance mm 3,525 4,255 3,155
Min. pin-to-pin distance mm 2,045 2,430 1,870
Hydraulic tank Box-shaped, closed type
Hydraulic oil filter Tank return side
Hydraulic oil cooler CF91-1 (Air-cooling type)
*1: Cushion is provided on head side
*2: Cushion is provided on bottom side

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 01-100 9


01 Specification
SEN06262-00 Weight table

Weight table 1

k This weight table is prepared for your reference when handling or transporting the components.

PC300-8M0, PC300LC-8M0
Unit: kg
Machine model PC300-8M0 PC300LC-8M0
Serial number 80001 and up
Engine assembly 1,175 1,175
q Engine 865 865
q Damper 14.3 14.3
q Hydraulic pump 205 205
Radiator and oil cooler assembly 187 187
Hydraulic tank and filter assembly (Not including
176 176
hydraulic oil)
Fuel tank and filter assembly (Not including fuel) 243 243
Revolving frame 2,844 2,844
Cab 570 570
Operator seat 35 35
Counterweight 5,480 5,480
Swing machinery 455 455
Control valve 242 242
Swing motor 91 91
Travel motor 165 x 2 165 x 2
Center swivel joint 29.9 29.9
Track frame assembly 7,552 8,078
q Track frame 3,946 4,285
q Swing circle 487 487
q Idler 169 x 2 169 x 2
q Idler cushion 283 x 2 283 x 2
q Carrier roller 28 x 4 28 x 4
q Track roller 53 x 14 53 x 16
q Final drive (including travel motor) 605 x 2 605 x 2
Track shoe assembly
q Standard triple shoe (600 mm) 3,470 3,700
q Standard triple shoe (700 mm) 4,030 4,300
q Wide triple shoe (800 mm) 4,380 4,680
q Load liner (Rubber pad type) (600 mm) – –
Boom assembly 2,392 2,392
Arm assembly 1,135 1,135
Bucket assembly 1,015 1,015
Boom cylinder assembly 262 x 2 262 x 2
Arm cylinder assembly 390 390
Bucket cylinder assembly 235 235
Link (large) assembly 316 316
Link (small) assembly – –
Boom pin 76 + 15 x 2 + 56 + 17 + 42 76 + 15 x 2 + 56 + 17 + 42
Arm pin 13 + 20 13 + 20
Bucket pin 30 x 2 30 x 2
Link pin 27 x 2 27 x 2

01-100 10 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


01 Specification
SEN06262-00

PC350-8M0, PC350LC-8M0
Unit: kg
Machine model PC350-8M0 PC350LC-8M0
Serial number 80001 and up
Engine assembly 1,175 1,175
q Engine 865 865
q Damper 14.3 14.3
q Hydraulic pump 205 205
Radiator and oil cooler assembly 187 187
Hydraulic tank and filter assembly (Not including
176 176
hydraulic oil)
Fuel tank assembly (Not including fuel) 238 238
Revolving frame 2,950 2,950
Cab 570 570
Operator seat 35 35
Counterweight 6,380 6,380
Swing machinery 455 455
Control valve 242 242
Swing motor 91 91
Travel motor 165 x 2 165 x 2
Center swivel joint 29.9 29.9
Track frame assembly 7,579 8,114
q Track frame 3,946 4,285
q Swing circle 487 487
q Idler 169 x 2 169 x 2
q Idler cushion 283 x 2 283 x 2
q Carrier roller 28 x 4 28 x 4
q Track roller (double frame) 57.5 x 6 57.5 x 8
q Track roller (single frame) 53 x 8 53 x 8
q Final drive (including travel motor) 605 x 2 605 x 2
Track shoe assembly
q Standard triple shoe (600 mm) 3,670 3,920
q Standard triple shoe (700 mm) 4,030 4,300
q Wide triple shoe (800 mm) – –
q Load liner (Rubber pad type) (600 mm) – –
Boom assembly 2,555 2,555
Arm assembly 1,247 1,247
Bucket assembly 1,508 1,508
Boom cylinder assembly 262 x 2 262 x 2
Arm cylinder assembly 390 390
Bucket cylinder assembly 235 235
Link (large) assembly 316 316
Link (small) assembly – –
Boom pin 76 + 15 x 2 + 56 + 17 + 42 76 + 15 x 2 + 56 + 17 + 42
Arm pin 13 + 20 13 + 20
Bucket pin 30 x 2 30 x 2
Link pin 27 x 2 27 x 2

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 01-100 11


01 Specification
SEN06262-00 Table of fuel, coolant and lubricants

Table of fuel, coolant and lubricants 1


a For details of the notes (Notes 1, Note 2...) in the table, see Operation and Maintenance Manual.

* ASTM: American Society of Testing and Material

01-100 12 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


01 Specification
Table of fuel, coolant and lubricants SEN06262-00

Unit: l
PC300/300LC-8M0, PC350/350LC-8M0
Reservoir
Specified (l) Refill (l)
Engine oil pan 39 37
Swing machinery case 16 16
Final drive case (each) 9 8
Damper case 1.3 1.3
Hydraulic system 365 188
Fuel tank 605 —
Cooling system 31 31

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 01-100 13


SEN06262-00

PC300-8M0, PC300LC-8M0, PC350-8M0, PC350LC-8M0 HYDRAULIC EXCAVATOR

Form No. SEN06262-00

© 2013 KOMATSU
All Rights Reserved
Printed in Japan 01-13 (01)

01-100 14
SEN06264-00

HYDRAULIC EXCAVATOR 1SHOP MANUAL

PC300-8M0
PC300LC-8M0
PC350-8M0
PC350LC-8M0

Machine model Serial number


PC300-8M0 80001 and up
PC300LC-8M0 80001 and up
PC350-8M0 80001 and up
PC350LC-8M0 80001 and up

10 Structure, function and


maintenance standard 1
100 Engine and cooling system
Engine related parts ....................................................................................................................................... 2
Radiator, oil cooler and aftercooler................................................................................................................. 3

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 10-100 1


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
SEN06264-00 Engine related parts

Engine related parts 1

1. Drive plate Outline


2. Torsion spring A wet type damper assembly is used.
3. Stopper pin Oil capacity: 1.3 l
4. Friction plate
5. Damper assembly
6. Muffler
7. Rear engine mount
8. Front engine mount

10-100 2 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
Radiator, oil cooler and aftercooler SEN06264-00

Radiator, oil cooler and aftercooler 1

1. Reservoir tank 6. Aftercooler


2. Radiator 7. Radiator inlet hose
3. Radiator cap 8. Radiator outlet hose
4. Oil cooler 9. Shroud
5. Guard

Specifications
Radiator: CF90-4
Oil cooler: CF91-1

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 10-100 3


SEN06264-00

PC300-8M0, PC300LC-8M0, PC350-8M0, PC350LC-8M0 HYDRAULIC EXCAVATOR

Form No. SEN06264-00

© 2013 KOMATSU
All Rights Reserved
Printed in Japan 01-13 (01)

10-100 4
SEN06265-00

HYDRAULIC EXCAVATOR 1SHOP MANUAL

PC300-8M0
PC300LC-8M0
PC350-8M0
PC350LC-8M0

Machine model Serial number


PC300-8M0 80001 and up
PC300LC-8M0 80001 and up
PC350-8M0 80001 and up
PC350LC-8M0 80001 and up

10 Structure, function and


maintenance standard 1
200 Power train
Power train...................................................................................................................................................... 2
Swing circle..................................................................................................................................................... 3
Swing machinery............................................................................................................................................. 4
Final drive ....................................................................................................................................................... 6
Sprocket .......................................................................................................................................................... 8

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 10-200 1


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
SEN06265-00 Power train

Power train 1

1. Idler
2. Center swivel joint
3. Control valve
4. Final drive
5. Travel motor (HMV160ADT-2)
6. Engine (SAA6D114E)
7. Hydraulic pump (HPV125+125)
8. Travel speed solenoid valve
9. Swing brake solenoid valve
10. Swing machinery
11. Swing motor (KMF160ABE-5 or KMF160AB-5)
12. Swing circle

10-200 2 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
Swing circle SEN06265-00

Swing circle 1

1. Swing circle inner race (No. of teeth: 90)


2. Ball
3. Swing circle outer race
a. Inner race soft zone “S“ position
b. Outer race soft zone “S“ position

Specifications
Reduction ratio: –90/13 = –6.923
Amount of grease bath: 33 l (G2-LI)

Unit: mm
No. Check Item Criteria Remedy
Axial clearance of bearing (when Standard clearance Clearance limit
4 mounted on chassis) Replace
0.5 to 1.6 3.2

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 10-200 3


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
SEN06265-00 Swing machinery

Swing machinery 1

10-200 4 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
Swing machinery SEN06265-00

1. Swing pinion (No. of teeth: 13) 8. No. 1 planetary carrier


2. Cover 9. No. 1 planetary gear (No. of teeth: 24)
3. Plate 10. Swing motor
4. No. 2 planetary carrier 11. Oil level gauge
5. Ring gear (No. of teeth: 68) 12. No. 1 sun gear (No. of teeth: 19)
6. No.2 planetary gear (No. of teeth: 25) 13. Case
7. No.2 sun gear (No. of teeth: 16) 14. Drain plug

Specifications
Reduction ratio: ((19+68)/19) x ((16+68)/16) = 24.039

Unit: mm
No. Check Item Criteria Remedy
Backlash between swing motor Standard clearance Clearance limit
15 shaft and No. 1 sun gear
0.18 to 0.28 –
Backlash between No. 1 sun gear
16 and No.1 planetary gear
0.15 to 0.51 1.00

Backlash between No. 1 planetary


17 gear and ring gear 0.17 to 0.60 1.20

Backlash between No. 1 planetary


18 carrier and No. 2 sun gear 0.40 to 0.75 1.50

Backlash between No. 2 sun gear


19 and No.2 planetary gear 0.14 to 0.44 0.90 Replace

Backlash between No. 2 planetary


20 gear and ring gear 0.16 to 0.55 1.10

Backlash between No. 2 planetary


21 carrier and swing pinion 0.07 to 0.23 –

Backlash between swing pinion and


22 swing circle 0 to 1.21 2.40

Clearance between plate and No. 2


23 planetary carrier 0.38 to 0.82 –

Standard size Repair limit Reapply hard


Wear of swing pinion surface con-
24 tacting with oil seal 0 chrome plating or
140 -0.100 – replace

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 10-200 5


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
SEN06265-00 Final drive

Final drive 1

1. Level plug 8. Cover


2. Drain plug 9. Ring gear (No. of teeth: 95)
3. No.1 planetary gear (No. of teeth: 42) 10. Hub
4. No.1 sun gear (No. of teeth: 10) 11. Sprocket
5. No. 2 sun gear (No. of teeth: 19) 12. Floating seal
6. No.1 planetary carrier 13. Travel motor
7. No. 2 planetary carrier 14. No. 2 planetary gear (No. of teeth: 37)

Specifications
Reduction ratio: –((10+95)/10) x ((19+95)/19) +1= –62.000

10-200 6 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
SEN06265-00

Unit: mm
No. Check Item Criteria Remedy
Backlash between No. 1 sun gear Standard clearance Clearance limit
15 and No.1 planetary gear
0.14 to 0.48 1.00
Backlash between No. 1 planetary
16 gear and ring gear
0.19 to 0.66 1.3

Backlash between No. 2 planetary


17 carrier and motor 0.06 to 0.25 –
Replace
Backlash between No. 2 sun gear
18 and No.2 planetary gear 0.15 to 0.51 1.00

Backlash between No. 2 planetary


19 gear and ring gear 0.19 to 0.66 1.3

Backlash between No. 2 planetary


20 carrier and No. 2 sun gear 0.44 to 0.74 1.6

21 Amount of wear on sprocket tooth Repair limit: 6 Build-up welding


Standard size Repair limit for rebuilding or
22 Width of sprocket tooth replace
87 81

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 10-200 7


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
SEN06265-00 Sprocket

Sprocket 1

Unit: mm
No. Check Item Criteria Remedy
Standard size Repair limit
1 Wear of tooth tip
336.5 324.5
Build-up welding
2 Thickness of tooth root 20 14
for rebuilding or
3 Width of tooth 87 84 replace
Repair limit: 6 (measure with the full-size drawing of sprocket tooth
4 Wear of tooth shape shape)

10-200 8 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
Sprocket SEN06265-00

Full-size drawing of sprocket tooth shape

a The above drawing is reduced to 62%. Enlarge it to 160% to return it to the full scale and make a copy
on an OHP sheet, and apply it to sprocket.

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 10-200 9


SEN06265-00

PC300-8M0, PC300LC-8M0, PC350-8M0, PC350LC-8M0 HYDRAULIC EXCAVATOR

Form No. SEN06265-00

© 2013 KOMATSU
All Rights Reserved
Printed in Japan 01-13 (01)

10-200 10
SEN06266-00

HYDRAULIC EXCAVATOR 1SHOP MANUAL

PC300-8M0
PC300LC-8M0
PC350-8M0
PC350LC-8M0

Machine model Serial No.


PC300-8M0 80001 and up
PC300LC-8M0 80001 and up
PC350-8M0 80001 and up
PC350LC-M0 80001 and up

10 Structure, function and


maintenance standard 1
300 Undercarriage and frame
Track frame and recoil spring.......................................................................................................................... 2
Idler ................................................................................................................................................................. 4
Carrier roller .................................................................................................................................................... 6
Track roller ...................................................................................................................................................... 7
Track shoe ...................................................................................................................................................... 9

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 10-300 1


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
SEN06266-00 Track frame and recoil spring

Track frame and recoil spring 1


a The following drawing indicates PC300-8M0.

1. Idler q The dimensions and the number of track roll-


2. Track frame ers depend on the model, but the basic struc-
3. Carrier roller ture is not different.
4. Final drive q Number of track rollers
5. Track roller
6. Center guard Model Q'ty (one side)
7. Front guard PC300, 350-8M0 7
PC300LC-8M0,
8
PC350LC-8M0

10-300 2 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
Track frame and recoil spring SEN06266-00

Standard shoe

Models
PC300-8M0 PC350-8M0 PC300LC-8M0 PC350LC-8M0
Item
Shoe width (triple shoe) (mm) 600 600 600 600
Link pitch (mm) 216 216 216 216
No. of shoes (one side) 45 45 48 48

Unit: mm
No. Check Item Criteria Remedy
Standard size Tolerance Rapair limit
Track +2
Vertical width of idler 123 127
8 guide frame –1
Idler sup- Build-up welding
120 ±0.5 118 for rebuilding or
port
replace
Track +3
266 271
Horizontal width of idler frame –1
9 guide Idler sup-
261 — 259
port
Standard size Rapair limit
Free length x Installation Installation Installation
Free length
10 Recoil spring O.D. length load load Replace
208.7 kN 167.0 kN
811 x 261 655 —
{21,290 kg} {17,030 kg}

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 10-300 3


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
SEN06266-00 Idler

Idler 1

10-300 4 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
Idler SEN06266-00

Unit: mm
No. Check Item Criteria Remedy
Standard size Rapair limit
1 Outside diameter of protrusion
635 —
2 Outside diameter of tread 590 578
Build-up welding for
3 Difference of tread 22.5 28.5 rebuilding or
4 Thickness of tread Measurement unable — replace

5 Total width 190 —


6 Width of tread 44 50
Standard Tolerance Standard Clearance
Clearance between shaft and bush- size Shaft Hole clearance limit
7 ing –0.225 +0.130 0.201 to
80 —
–0.325 –0.024 0.455
Replace bushing
Standard Tolerance Standard Interference
Interference between idler and size Shaft Hole interference limit
8 bushing
+0.087 –0.027 0.064 to
87.6 —
+0.037 –0.079 0.166
Clearance between bushing and Standard size Clearance limit
9 support —
(Sum of clearance at both sides) 0.68 to 1.22 —

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 10-300 5


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
SEN06266-00 Carrier roller

Carrier roller 1

Unit: mm
No. Check Item Criteria Remedy
Standard size Rapair limit
1 Outside diameter of flange
179 —
2 Outside diameter of tread 152 138
3 Width of tread 48.2 —
4 Thickness of tread 32 25
5 Width of flange 19 —
Standard Tolerance Standard Clearance
Clearance between shaft and bush- size Shaft Hole clearance limit Replace
6 ing –0.250 +0.100 0.214 to
54 —
–0.280 –0.036 0.380
Standard Tolerance Standard Interference
Interference between roller and size Shaft Hole interference limit
7 bushing +0.117 +0.030 0.057 to
61 —
+0.087 +0.040 0.117
Standard clearance Clearance limit
8 Axial clearance of roller
0.5 to 0.7 —

10-300 6 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
Track roller SEN06266-00

Track roller 1

Unit: mm
No. Check Item Criteria Remedy
Standard size Rapair limit
1 Outside diameter of outer flange
216 —
2 Inside diametor of outer flange 210 —
3 Outside diameter of tread 180 168
4 Thickness of tread 54 48
Build-up welding
5 Overal width 250 — for rebuilding or
Single flange 49 replace
6 Width of tread —
Double flange 47.7
Single flange
7 Width of flange 27 —
Double flange
Width of inner frange
8 (Double frame) 98 —

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 10-300 7


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
SEN06266-00 Track roller

Unit: mm
No. Check Item Criteria Remedy
Clearance between bushing and
9 collar 0.44 to 0.97 —
(Sum of clearance at both sides)
Standard Tolerance Standard Clearance
Clearance between shaft and size Shaft Hole clearance limit
10 bushing –0.250 +0.186 0.186 to Replace bushing
65 —
–0.350 –0.064 0.536
Standard Tolerance Standard Interference
Interference between roller and size Shaft Hole interference limit
11 bushing +0.108 –0.006 0.014 to
72 —
+0.008 –0.036 0.144

10-300 8 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
Track shoe SEN06266-00

Track shoe 1

a P portion shows the link of bushing press fitting end.

Unit: mm
No. Check Item Criteria Remedy
Standard size Repair limit
1 Link pitch Reverse or
216.3 219.3
replace
2 Outside diameter of bushing 66.9 61.9
3 Thickness of bushing metal 10.8 5.8 Adjust or replace
4 Link height 116 107
Thickness of link metal (bushing Repair or replace
5 press-fitting portion) 30.7 21.7

6 178.4
7 Shoe bolt pitch 140.4 Replace
8 76.2

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 10-300 9


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
SEN06266-00 Track shoe

Unit: mm
No. Check Item Criteria Remedy
Inside
9 width
102

Overall
10 Link width
47.8 Repair or replace

Tread
11 width
42.6

12 Protrusion of pin 4.2


13 Protrusion of regular bushing 5.25
14 Overall length of pin 242
Adjust or replace
15 Overall length of bushing 148.4
Standard size Reverse
16 Thickness of spacer
10.8 5.8
17 Bushing 98 to 264.6 kN {10 to 27 ton}
Regular
18 pin
147 to 362.6 kN {15 to 37 ton}
Press-fitting force —
19 Master
98 to 215.6 kN {10 to 22 ton}
(*) pin
Tightening torque
Retightening angle (deg.)
a. Regu- (Nm {kgm})
lar link 393±39
Triple grouser shoe 120±10
20 Shoe bolt {40±4} Retighten
Tightening torque Lower limit torque
b. Master Retightening angle (deg.)
(Nm {kgm}) (Nm {kgm})
link
— — —
Tolerance Standard interfer-
Standard size
Interference between bushing and Shaft Hole ence
21 link
+0.464 +0.074
66.5 0.350 to 0.464
+0.424 +0.074
Interference between regular pin +0.235 –0.188
22 and link 44.6
+0.085 –0.250
0.273 to 0.485

Tolerance
Standard size Standard clearance
Clearance between regular pin and Shaft Hole
23 bushing +0.235 +0.915
44.6 0.180 to 0.830 Adjust or replace
+0.085 +0.415
Tolerance Standard interfer-
Standard size
24 Interference between master pin Shaft Hole ence
(*) and link +0.03 –0.188
44.6 0.188 to 0.280
+0.03 –0.250
Tolerance
Standard size Standard clearance
25 Clearance between master pin and Shaft Hole
(*) bushing +0.050 +0.915
44.3 0.365 to 0.965
–0.050 +0.415

* Dry type track link

10-300 10 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
Track shoe SEN06266-00

Triple grouser shoe

Unit: mm
No. Check Item Criteria Remedy
Standard size Repair limit
*1
1 Height 30 18
*2 36 24
2 Thickness 11
*1 29
3
*2 32
Length of base
*1 24
4
*2 26 Build-up welding
*1 22 for rebuilding or
5 replace
*2 24
*1 16
6 Length at tip
*2 18
*1 22
7
*2 18
Standard size Repair limit
*1
8 Thickness 41 29
*2 47 35

*1: PC300-8M0, PC300LC-8M0: 600 mm width shoe


*2: PC350-8M0, PC350LC-8M0: 600 mm width shoe

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 10-300 11


SEN06266-00

PC300-8M0, PC300LC-8M0, PC350-8M0, PC350LC-8M0 HYDRAULIC EXCAVATOR

Form No. SEN06266-00

© 2013 KOMATSU
All Rights Reserved
Printed in Japan 01-13 (01)

10-300 12
SEN06267-00

HYDRAULIC EXCAVATOR 1SHOP MANUAL

PC300-8M0
PC300LC-8M0
PC350-8M0
PC350LC-8M0

Machine model Serial number


PC300-8M0 80001 and up
PC300LC-8M0 80001 and up
PC350-8M0 80001 and up
PC350LC-8M0 80001 and up

10 Structure, function and


maintenance standard 1
401 Hydraulic system, Part 1
Hydraulic equipment layout drawing ............................................................................................................... 2
Hydraulic tank and filter .................................................................................................................................. 4
Hydraulic pump ............................................................................................................................................... 6

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 10-401 1


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
SEN06267-00 Hydraulic equipment layout drawing

Hydraulic equipment layout drawing 1

10-401 2 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
Hydraulic equipment layout drawing SEN06267-00

1. Bucket cylinder
2. Arm cylinder
3. Boom cylinder
4. Swing motor
5. Control valve
6. Oil cooler
7. Hydraulic filter
8. Hydraulic pump
9. L.H. travel motor
10. Hydraulic tank
11. Multi-pattern selector valve
12. L.H. PPC valve
13. Work equipment lock lever (electric type)
14. Center swivel joint
15. R.H. PPC valve
16. Travel PPC valve
17. Attachment circuit selector valve
18. Hydraulic drift prevention valve
19. Accumulator
20. Solenoid valve assembly
20A. PPC lock solenoid
20B. Travel junction solenoid
20C. Pump merge-divider solenoid
20D. Travel speed solenoid
20E. Swing brake solenoid
20F. Machine push-up solenoid
20G. 2-stage relief solenoid

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 10-401 3


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
SEN06267-00 Hydraulic tank and filter

Hydraulic tank and filter 1

1. Oil filler cap Specifications


2. Bypass valve Tank capacity: 275 l
3. Strainer Amount of oil inside tank: 188 l
4. Filter element
5. Sight gauge Safety valve
6. Hydraulic tank Relief cracking pressure:
7. Additional breather 16.7 ± 6.9 kPa {0.17 ± 0.07 kg/cm2}
Bypass valve set pressure:
250 ± 50 kPa {2.5 ± 0.5 kg/cm2}
Additional breather
Relief cracking pressure:
0.1 ± 0.015 MPa {1.0 ± 0.15 kg/cm2}
Suction cracking pressure:
2.0 ± 0.3 kPa {0.02 ± 0.003 kg/cm2}

10-401 4 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
Hydraulic tank and filter SEN06267-00

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 10-401 5


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
SEN06267-00 Hydraulic pump

Hydraulic pump 1
Type: HPV125+125

10-401 6 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
Hydraulic pump SEN06267-00

Outline
q This pump consists of 2 variable capacity
swash plate piston pumps, PC valve, LS valve,
EPC valve and variable volume valve.

BMP: Breather fitting port


IM: PC mode selector current
ISIG: LS set pressure selector current
OCP: Oil level detection port
PAF: Front pump delivery port
PAR: Rear pump delivery port
PBF: Front pump pressure input port
PBR: Rear pump pressure input port
PD1F: Case drain port
PD1R: Air breeder
PD2F: Drain plug
PD2R: Drain plug
PENF: Front control pressure detection port
PENR: Rear control pressure detection port
PEPC: EPC basic pressure port
PEPB: EPC basic pressure detection port
PFC: Front pump delivery pressure detection port
PLSC: LS set selector pressure detection port
PLSF: Front load pressure input port
PLSFC: Front load pressure detection port
PLSR: Rear load pressure input port
PLSRC: Rear load pressure detection port
PM: PC mode selector pressure detection port
PRC: Rear pump delivery pressure detection port
PS: Pump suction port

1. Front pump
2. Rear pump
3. LS valve
4. PC valve
5. LS-EPC valve
6. PC-EPC valve
7. Variable volume valve

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 10-401 7


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
SEN06267-00 Hydraulic pump

1. Front shaft 8. Valve plate


2. Cradle 9. End cap
3. Front case 10. Rear shaft
4. Rocker cam 11. Rear case
5. Shoe 12. Servo piston
6. Piston 13. PC valve
7. Cylinder block

10-401 8 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
Hydraulic pump SEN06267-00

Function
q The pump converts the engine rotation trans-
mitted to the shaft to oil pressure and delivers
pressurized oil corresponding to the load.
q It is possible to change the discharge amount
by changing the swash plate angle.

Structure
q Cylinder block (7) is supported to shaft (1) by q Piston (6) carries out relative movement in the
spline (14). axial direction inside each cylinder chamber of
q Shaft (1) is supported by front and rear bear- cylinder block (7).
ings (15). q Cylinder block (7) seals the pressurized oil to
q Tip of piston (6) is shaped as a concave ball valve plate (8) and carries out relative rotation.
and shoe (5) is caulked to it to form one unit. q This surface is designed so that the oil pres-
q Piston (6) and shoe (5) constitute the spherical sure balance is maintained at a suitable level.
bearing. q The oil inside each cylinder chamber of cylin-
q Rocker cam (4) has flat surface (A), and shoe der block (7) is suctioned and discharged
(5) is always pressed against this surface while through valve plate (8).
sliding in a circular movement.
q Rocker cam (4) conducts high pressure oil to
cylinder surface (B) with cradle (2), which is
secured to the case, and forms a static pres-
sure bearing when it slides.

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 10-401 9


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
SEN06267-00 Hydraulic pump

Operation of pump
q Cylinder block (7) rotates together with shaft q As center line (X) of rocker cam (4) matches
(1), and shoe (5) slides on flat surface (A). the axial direction of cylinder block (7) (swash
q When this happens, rocker cam (4) moves plate angle (a) = 0), the difference between
along cylindrical surface (B), so angle (a) volumes (E) and (F) inside cylinder block (7)
between center line (X) of rocker cam (4) and becomes 0.
th e axia l d ir ection of cylinde r bloc k ( 7) q Suction and discharge of pressurized oil is not
changes. carried out in this state. Namely pumping
q (a) is named the swash plate angle. action is not performed. (Actually, however, the
swash plate angle is not set to 0)

q With center line (X) of rocker cam (4) at a


swash plate angle (a) in relation to the axial
direction of cylinder block (7), flat surface (A)
acts as a cam in relation to shoe (5).
q In this way, piston (6) slides on the inside of
cylinder block (7), so a difference between vol-
umes (E) and (F) is created inside cylinder
block (7).
q A single piston (6) sucks and discharges the oil
by the amount (F) – (E).
q As cylinder block (7) rotates and the volume of
chamber (E) becomes smaller, the pressurized
oil is discharged.
q On the other hand, the volume of chamber (F)
grows larger and, in this process, the oil is suc-
tioned.

10-401 10 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
Hydraulic pump SEN06267-00

Control of discharge amount


q If the swash plate angle (a) becomes larger,
the difference between volumes (E) and (F)
becomes larger and pump delivery (Q)
increases.
q Servo piston (12) is used for changing swash
plate angle (a).
q Servo piston (12) carries out linear reciprocal
movement according to the signal pressure
from the PC and LS valves.
q This linear movement is transmitted to rocker
cam (4) via slider (13).
q Being supported by cradle (2) on the cylindrical
surface, rocker cam (4) slides on the surface
while continuing revolving movement.
q Space of the pressure receiving area of servo
piston (12) are not identical on the left side and
right side. Main pump discharge pressure (self
pressure) (PP) is always brought to the pres-
sure chamber of the small diameter piston
side.
q Output pressure (PEN) of the LS valve is
brought to the chamber receiving the pressure
at the large diameter piston end.
q The relationship in the size of pressure (PP) at
the small diameter piston end and pressure
(PEN) at the large diameter piston end, and
the ratio between the area receiving the pres-
sure of the small diameter piston and the large
diameter piston controls the movement of
servo piston (12).

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 10-401 11


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
SEN06267-00 Hydraulic pump

1. LS valve

PA: Pump port 1. Sleeve


PDP: Drain port 2. Piston
PLP: LS control pressure output port 3. Spool
PLS: LS pressure input port 4. Spring
PP: Pump port 5. Seat
PPL: Control pressure input port 6. Sleeve
PSIG: LS mode selector pilot port 7. Plug
8. Locknut

Function Front pump


q The LS (load sensing) valve detects the load
and controls the discharge amount.
q This valve controls main pump delivery (Q)
according to differential pressure (EPLS)[= PP
– LS], called the LS differential pressure (the
difference between main pump pressure PP
and control valve outlet port pressure PLS).
q Main pump pressure (PP), pressure (PLS)
(called the LS pressure) coming from the con-
trol valve output, and pressure (PSIG) (called
the LS selector pressure) from the proportional
solenoid valve enter this valve.
q The relationship between the LS differential
pressure between the main pump pressure
(PP) and LS pressure (PLS) (EPLS) [= (PP) – Rear pump
(PLS)] and the pump delivery (Q) changes as
shown in the diagram according to LS selector
current (ISIG) of the LS-EPC valve.
q If (ISIG) changes from 0 to 1A, setting force
the spring changes, too. As the result, the
specified median of the pump delivery volume
switching point changes as shown in the dia-
gram. As for the front pump side, it will change
in the range of 0.98 to 2.45 MPa {in the range
of 10 to 25 kg/cm2] and as for the rear pump
side, it will change in the range of 1.08 to 2.55
MPa {in the range of 11 to 26 kg/cm2}.

10-401 12 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
Hydraulic pump SEN06267-00

Operation

1) When the control valve is situated at neutral

q The LS valve is a 3-way selector valve, with q Spool (6) is pushed to the right, and port (C)
pressure (PLS) (LS pressure) from the outlet and port (D) will be connected.
port of the control valve brought to spring q Pump pressure (PP) is conducted to the larger
chamber (B), and main pump discharge pres- diameter end from the port (K).
sure (PP) brought to port (H) of sleeve (8). q The same pump pressure (PP) is conducted to
q Magnitude of the force resulting from this LS the smaller diameter end from the port (J).
pressure (PLS), force of spring (4) and the q According to the difference in the areas on
pump delivery pressure (self pressure) (PP) servo piston (12), the pressure moves in such
determine the position of spool (6). that the swash plate angle may be minimized.
q However, magnitude of the output pressure
(PSIG) (called the LS selector pressure) of the
EPC valve for the LS valve entering port (G)
also changes the position of spool (6). (Setting
force of the spring is changed)
q Before the engine is started, servo piston (12) is
pushed to the right. (See the figure)
q If the control lever is at the neutral position
when the engine is started, LS pressure (PLS)
will be set to 0 MPa {0 kg/cm2}. (It is intercon-
nected to the drain circuit via the control valve
spool)

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 10-401 13


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
SEN06267-00 Hydraulic pump

2) Action for the direction of maximizing the pump delivery

q When the difference between the main pump q If the output pressure of the EPC valve for the
pressure (PP) and LS pressure (PLS), in other LS valve enters port (G), rightward force is
words, LS differential pressure (EPLS) generated on piston (7).
becomes smaller (for example, when the area q If piston (7) is pushed to the right, setting force
of opening of the control valve becomes larger of spring (4) is weakened, changing the LS dif-
and pump pressure PP drops), spool (6) is ferential pressure (EPLS) [Difference between
pushed to the left by the combined force of LS oil pressures (PLS) and (PP)] when ports (D)
pressure (PLS) and the force of spring (4). and (E) of spool (6) are connected.
q When spool (6) moves, port (D) and port (E)
are interconnected and connected to the PC
valve.
q The PC valve is connected to the drain port, so
the pressure across circuits (D) and (K)
becomes drain pressure (PT). (The operation
of the PC valve is explained later.)
q The pressure at the large diameter end of
servo piston (12) becomes drain pressure
(PT), and pump pressure (PP) enters port (J)
at the small diameter end, so servo piston (12)
is pushed to the left side. Therefore, the swash
plate is moved in the direction to make the dis-
charge amount larger.

10-401 14 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
Hydraulic pump SEN06267-00

3) Action for the direction of minimizing the pump delivery

q When LS differential pressure (EPLS)


becomes larger (for example, when the area of
opening of the control valve becomes smaller
and pump pressure (PP) rises) because of the
rightward move (it reduces discharge amount)
of servo piston (12), pump pressure (PP)
pushes spool (6) to the right.
q When spool (6) moves, main pump pressure
(PP) flows from port (C) to port (D) and from
port (K), it enters the large diameter end of the
piston.
q Main pump pressure (PP) also enters port (J)
of the small diameter end of the piston, but
because of the difference in area between the
large diameter end and the small diameter end
on servo piston (12), it is pushed to the right.
As the result, servo piston (12) moves into the
direction of reducing the swash plate angle.
q As LS selector pressure (PSIG) is input to port
(G), setting force of spring (4) is reduced.

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 10-401 15


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
SEN06267-00 Hydraulic pump

4) When servo piston is balanced

q Let us take the area receiving the pressure at q Force of spring (4) is adjusted in such that the
the large diameter end of the piston as (A1), position of the balanced stop of this spool (6)
the area receiving the pressure at the small may be determined when (PP) – (PLS) = 2.45
diameter end as (A0), and the pressure flowing MPa {25 kg/cm2} on the front pump side and
into the large diameter end of the piston as (PP) – (PLS) = 2.55 MPa {26 kg/cm2} on the
(PEN). rear pump side at the median of the specified
q If the main pump pressure (PP) of the LS valve value.
and the combined force of spring (4) and LS q If (PSIG) [Output pressure of LS-EPC valve, 0
pressure (PLS) are balanced, and the relation- to 2.9 MPa {0 to 30 kg/cm2}] is input to port (G),
ship is (A0) x (PP) = (A1) x (PEN), servo piston the position of the balanced stop is changed.
(12) will stop in that position. The front pump side will be moved in the range
q And the swash plate of the pump will be held in of (PP) –(PLS) = 2.45 to 0.98 MPa {25 to 0 kg/
an intermediate position. [Spool (6) will be cm2} and the rear pump will be moved in the
stopped at a position where the distance of the range of (PP) – (PLS) = 2.55 to 1.08 MPa {26
opening from port (D) to port (E) and the dis- to 11 kg/cm2} in proportion to (PSIG) pressure.
tance from port (C) to port (D) is almost the
same.]
q At this point, the relationship between the pres-
sure receiving areas across servo piston (12)
is (A0) : (A1) = 3 : 5, so the pressure applied
across the piston when it is balanced becomes
(PP) : (PEN) C 5 : 3

10-401 16 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
Hydraulic pump SEN06267-00

2. PC valve

PA: Pump port 1. Plug


PA2: Pump pressure pilot port 2. Servo piston assembly
PDP: Drain port 3. Pin
PM: Mode selector pressure pilot port 4. Spool
PPL: Control pressure output port (to LS valve) 5. Retainer
6. Seat
7. Cover
8. Wiring

Function
q When the pump discharge pressure (PP1) q If the engine speed goes below the specified
(self-pressure) and (PP2) (other pump pres- value because of increased load, the controller
sure) are high, the PC valve controls the pump sends a command current to PC-EPC valve
so that the volume of oil beyond the discharge solenoid in order to reduce the slope angle in
pressure-based specific flowrate may not be proportion to reduction in the engine speed.
conducted however you may increase the con-
trol valve stroke. Namely it is intended at con-
trolling the horse power for the pumps so that it
may not exceed the engine hose power.
q If the pump discharge pressure increases due
to increased load during operation, this valve
decreases the pump delivery.
q And if the pump delivery pressure goes low, it
increases the pump delivery.
q In this case, relation between the mean dis-
charge pressure of the front and rear pumps
[(PP1) + (PP2)]/2 and the pump delivery (Q)
will becomes as shown in the diagram if the
relation is represented as the parameter the
current value (X) to be given to PC-EPC valve
solenoid.
q The controller continues counting the actual
engine speed.
q If the engine speed is slowed down due to
increased load, the controller reduces the
pump delivery to recover the speed.

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 10-401 17


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
SEN06267-00 Hydraulic pump

Operation

1) When pump controller is normal

(1) When the load on the actuator is small and pump discharge pressures (PP1) and (PP2) are low

Action of PC-EPC valve solenoid (1)


q Command current (X) is being sent to PC-EPC a Other pump's pressure denotes the pressure
valve solenoid (1) from the pump controller. of the pump situated on the opposite side.
q This command current acts on PC-EPC valve
to output the signal pressure in order to modify For the front pump pressure, the other pump's
the force pushing piston (2). pressure is that of the rear pump.
q Spool (3) stops at a position where the com-
bined spool-pushing force is balanced by the And for the rear pump pressure, the other
setting force of springs (4) and (6) as well as pump's pressure is that of the front pump.
the pump pressures (PP1) (self-pressure) and
(PP2) (another pump's pressure).
q The pressure [port (C) pressure] output from
PC valve is changed depending on the above
position.
q The size of command current (X) is determined
by the nature of the operation (lever opera-
tion), the selected working mode, and the set
value and actual value of the engine speed.

10-401 18 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
Hydraulic pump SEN06267-00

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 10-401 19


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
SEN06267-00 Hydraulic pump

Action of spring
q Load of springs (4) and (6) on the PC valve is q When pump pressures (PP1) and (PP2) are
determined by the swash plate position. small, spool (3) will be positioned in the left
q As servo piston (9) moves to right, spring (6) is side.
retracted. q Port (C) and (D) are connected, and the pres-
q If the servo piston moves further, it will be con- sure entering the LS valve becomes drain
tacted again seat (5) and spring (6) will be pressure (PT).
fixed. q If port (E) and port (G) of the LS valve are con-
q After that, spring (4) alone will operate. nected, the pressure entering the large diame-
q The spring load is changed by servo piston (9) ter end of the piston from port (J) becomes
as it extends or compresses springs (4) and drain pressure (PT), and servo piston (9)
(6). moves to the left side.
q If the command current (X) to PC-EPC valve q The pump delivery will be set to the increasing
solenoid (1) changes, so does the force push- trend.
ing piston (2). q Accompanied with move of servo piston (9),
q Spring load of springs (4) and (6) is also springs (4) and (6) will be expanded and the
affected by the command current (X) to PC- spring force becomes weaker.
EPC valve solenoid. q As the spring force is weakened, spool (3)
q Port (C) of the PC valve is connected to port moves to the right, the connecting between
(E) of the LS valve. port (C) and port (D) is shut off and the pump
q Self pressure (PP1) enters port (B) and the discharge pressure ports (B) and (C) are con-
small diameter end of servo piston (9), and nected.
other pump pressure (PP2) enters port (A).

10-401 20 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
Hydraulic pump SEN06267-00

q As a result, the pressure on port (C) rises and


the pressure on the large diameter end of the
piston also rises. Thus, the leftward move of
servo piston (9) is stopped.
q Servo piston (9) stop position (= Pump deliv-
ery) is decided by the position where the push-
ing force generated from the pressures (PP1)
and (PP2) applied to spool (3), the pushing
force of the solenoid in PC-EPC valve gener-
ates and the pushing force of springs (4) and
(6) are balanced.

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 10-401 21


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
SEN06267-00 Hydraulic pump

(2) When load on actuator is large and pump discharge pressure is high

Outline Operation
q When the load is large and pump discharge q When port (E) and port (G) of the LS valve are
pressures (PP1) and (PP2) are high, the force connected, this pressure from port (J) enters
pushing spool (3) to the right becomes larger the large diameter end of servo piston (9),
and spool (3) will be moved to the position stopping servo piston (9).
shown in above figure. q If main pump pressure (PP2) increases further
q Part of the pressure to be conducted from port and spool (3) moves further to the right, main
(C) to LS valve flows from port (B) to port (C) pump pressure (PP1) flows to port (C) and acts
and (D) via LS valve. At the end this flow, level to make the pump delivery the minimum.
of this pressure becomes approximately half of q When servo piston (9) moves to the right,
the main pump pressure (PP2). springs (4) and (6) are compressed and push
back spool (3).
q When spool (3) moves to the left, the opening
of port (C) and port (D) becomes larger.
q As a result, the pressure on port (C) (= J) is
decreased and the rightward move servo pis-
ton (9) is stopped.
q The position in which servo piston (9) stops at
this time is further to the right than the position
when pump pressures (PP1) and (PP2) are
low.

10-401 22 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
Hydraulic pump SEN06267-00

q The relationship between the average pump


pressure (PP1 + PP2)/2 and servo piston (9) in
terms of their positions can be represented by
the broken line in the figure springs (4) and (6)
form the double springs.
q The relationship between the average pump
pressure (PP1 + PP2)/2 and average pump
delivery (Q) becomes as shown below.

q If command voltage (X) sent to PC-EPC valve


solenoid (1) increases further, the relationship
between average pump pressure (PP1 + PP2)/
2, and pump delivery (Q) is proportional to the
force of the PC-EPC valve solenoid and moves
in parallel.
q Namely, the force of PC-EPC valve solenoid
(1) is added to the pushing force to the right
because of the pump pressure applied to the
spool (3), so the relationship between the aver-
age pump pressure (PP1 + PP2)/2 and the
pump delivery (Q) moves from (A) to (B) as the
command current (X) is increased.

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 10-401 23


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
SEN06267-00 Hydraulic pump

2) As the emergency pump drive switch is turned on due to failure on the pump controller

(1) When the main pump is under light load

q If there is a failure in the pump controller, the q Since the pressure on the small diameter end
emergency pump drive switch is turned on to of the piston large, servo piston (9) moves in
hand the control to the resistor side. the direction to make the discharge amount
q In this case, the power is directly supplied from larger.
the battery. The current, however, is too large
as is, so the resistor is set in between to con-
trol the current flowing to PC-EPC valve sole-
noid (1).
q The current becomes constant, so the force
pushing piston (2) is also constant.
q If the main pump pressures (PP1) and (PP2)
are low, the combined force of the pump pres-
sure and the PC-EPC valve solenoid (1) is
weaker than the spring set force, so spool (3)
is balanced at a position to the left.
q At this point, port (C) is connected to the drain
pressure of port (D), and the large diameter
end of the piston of servo piston (9) also
becomes the drain pressure (PT) through the
LS valve.

10-401 24 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
Hydraulic pump SEN06267-00

(2) When the main pump is under heavy load

q If the emergency pump drive switch is turned q The curve resulting when the emergency pump
on In the same way as in above, the command drive switch is ON is situated further to the left
current (X) sent to PC-EPC valve solenoid (1) (B) than when the pump controller is normal
becomes constant. (A).
q For this reason, the force of piston (2) pushing
spool (3) is constant.
q If main pump pressures (PP1) and (PP2)
increase, spool (3) moves further to the right
than when the main pump load is light, and is
balanced at the position in the diagram above.
q In this case, the pressure from port (B) flows to
port (C), so servo piston (9) moves to the right
(smaller pump delivery) and stops at a position
to the further to the right then when the load on
the pump is light.
q When the emergency pump drive switch is
turned on, too, the pump pressure (PP) and
pump delivery (Q) have a relationship as
shown with the curve in the figure correspond-
ing to the current sent to the PC-EPC valve
solenoid through the resistor.

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 10-401 25


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
SEN06267-00 Hydraulic pump

3. LS(PC)-EPC Valve

C: To LS(PC) valve
P: From self pressure reducing valve
T: To tank

1. Connector
2. Coil
3. Body
4. Spring
5. Spool
6. Rod
7. Plunger

10-401 26 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
Hydraulic pump SEN06267-00

Function Operation
q The EPC valve consists of the proportional
solenoid portion and the hydraulic valve por- 1) When signal current is 0 (coil is deener-
tion. gized)
q When it receives signal current (i) from the q When there is no signal current flowing from
controller, it generates the EPC output pres- the controller to coil (2), coil (2) is deenergized.
sure in proportion to the size of the signal, and q Spool (5) is pushed to the left by spring (4).
outputs it to the LS (PC) valve. q Port (P) closes and the pressurized oil from the
self pressure reducing valve does not flow to
the LS (PC) valve.
q The pressurized oil from the LS (PC) valve is
drained to the tank via port (C) and port (T).

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 10-401 27


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
SEN06267-00 Hydraulic pump

2) When signal current is very small (coil is 3) When signal current is maximum (coil is
energized) energized)
q When a very small signal current flows to coil q As the signal current flows to coil (2), coil (2) is
(2), coil (2) is energized, and a propulsion force energized.
is generated on the right side of plunger (7). q When this happens, the signal current is at its
q Rod (6) pushes spool (5) to the right, and pres- maximum, so the propulsion force of plunger
surized oil flows from port (P) to port (C). (7) is also at its maximum.
q Pressures on port (C) increases and the force q Spool (5) is pushed toward right side by rod
to act on spool (5) surface and the spring load (6).
on spring (4) become larger than the propul- q The maximum volume of pressurized oil is
sion force of plunger (7). conducted from port (P) to port (C), increasing
q Spool (5) is pushed to the left, and port (P) is the circuit pressure across EPC valve and LS
shut off from port (C). (PC) valve to the maximum level.
q Port (C) and port (T) are connected. q Since port (T) is closed, pressurized oil does
q Spool (5) moves up and down so that the pro- not flow to the tank.
pulsion force of plunger (7) may be balance
with pressure of port (C) + spring load of spring
(4).
q The circuit pressure between the EPC valve
and the LS (PC) valve is controlled in propor-
tion to the size of the signal current.

10-401 28 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
Hydraulic pump SEN06267-00

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 10-401 29


SEN06267-00

PC300-8M0, PC300LC-8M0, PC350-8M0, PC350LC-8M0 HYDRAULIC EXCAVATOR

Form No. SEN06267-00

© 2013 KOMATSU
All Rights Reserved
Printed in Japan 01-13 (01)

10-401 30
SEN06268-00

HYDRAULIC EXCAVATOR 1SHOP MANUAL

PC300-8M0
PC300LC-8M0
PC350-8M0
PC350LC-8M0

Machine model Serial number


PC300-8M0 80001 and up
PC300LC-8M0 80001 and up
PC350-8M0 80001 and up
PC350LC-8M0 80001 and up

10 Structure, function and


maintenance standard 1
402 Hydraulic system, Part 2
Control valve................................................................................................................................................... 2
CLSS ............................................................................................................................................................ 14
Functions and operation by valve ................................................................................................................. 18
Merge-divider valve ...................................................................................................................................... 33
Attachment circuit selector valve .................................................................................................................. 57
Hydraulic drift prevention valve..................................................................................................................... 60

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 10-402 1


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
SEN06268-00 Control valve

Control valve 1
Outline
q The control valve consists of a 7-spool valve
(6-spool valve + boom Hi, arm Hi valve) and a
set of service valves. A merge-divider valve, a
back pressure valve, a boom drift prevention
valve are installed to it.
q Since all the valves are assembled together
with connecting bolts and their passes are con-
nected to each other inside the assembly, the
assembly is compact and easy to maintain.

A1: To bucket cylinder bottom PLS1: To front pump control


A2: To L.H. travel motor PLS2: To rear pump control
A3: To boom cylinder bottom PP1: From front pump
A4: To swing motor PP2: From rear pump
A5: To R.H. travel motor PP1S: Pressure sensor mounting port
A6: To arm cylinder head PP2S: Pressure sensor mounting port
A-1: To boom cylinder bottom PPS1: To front pump control
A-2: To Attachment 1 PPS2: To rear pump control
A-3: To Attachment 2 PR: To solenoid valve, PPC valve, and EPC valve
B1: To bucket cylinder head PS: From merge-divide solenoid valve
B2: To L.H. travel motor PST: From travel junction valve solenoid valve
B3: To boom cylinder head PX1: From 2-stage relief solenoid valve
B4: To swing motor PX2: From 2-stage relief solenoid valve
B5: To R.H. travel motor T: To tank
B6: To arm cylinder bottom T1: To tank
B-1: To arm cylinder bottom TS: To tank
B-2: To Attachment 1 TSW: To swing motor S-port (suction side)
B-3: To Attachment 2
BP1: Boom raising PPC output pressure 1. 6-spool valve
BP5: From 2-stage safety valve solenoid valve 2. Cover A
BP6: From attachment select solenoid valve 3. Cover B
CN: Variable back pressure selector solenoid con- 4. Boom Hi and arm Hi valve
trolle valve 5. Service valve 1
P1: From bucket PPC and EPC valves 6. Service valve 2
P2: From bucket PPC and EPC valves 7. Merge-divider valve
P3: From L.H. Travel PPC valve 8. Boom drift prevention valve
P4: From L.H. Travel PPC valve 9. Quick return valve
P5: From boom PPC and EPC valves 10. Boom Hi valve check valve
P6: From boom PPC and EPC valves
P7: From swing PPC and EPC valves
P8: From swing PPC and EPC valves
P9: From R.H. Travel PPC valve
P10: From R.H. Travel PPC valve
P11: From arm PPC and EPC valves
P12: From arm PPC and EPC valves
P-3: From Service 1 and PPC valves
P-4: From Service 1 and PPC valves
P-5: From Service 2 and PPC valves
P-6: From Service 2 and PPC valves

10-402 2 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
Control valve SEN06268-00

General view

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 10-402 3


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
SEN06268-00 Control valve

Sectional view
(1/5)

10-402 4 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
Control valve SEN06268-00

1. Pressure compensation valve (Arm out)


2. Pressure compensation valve (R.H. travel
reverse)
3. Pressure compensation valve (Left swing)
4. Pressure compensation valve (Boom raise)
5. Pressure compensation valve (L.H. travel
reverse)
6. Pressure compensation valve (Bucket dump)
7. Pressure compensation valve (Boom Hi raise)
8. Pressure compensation valve (Service 1)
9. Pressure compensation valve (Service 2)
10. Pressure compensation valve (Arm Hi in)
11. Pressure compensation valve (Bucket curl)
12. Pressure compensation valve (L.H. travel for-
ward)
13. Pressure compensation valve (Boom lower)
14. Pressure compensation valve (Right swing)
15. Pressure compensation valve (R.H. travel for-
ward)
16. Pressure compensation valve (Arm in)
17. Main relief valve
18. Unload valve
19. Main relief valve
20. Spool (Service 2)
21. Spool (Service 1)
22. Spool (Boom Hi)
23. Spool (Bucket)
24. Spool (L.H. travel)
25. Spool (Boom)
26. Spool (Swing)
27. Spool (R.H. travel)
28. Spool (Arm)
29. Spool (Arm Hi)

Unit: mm

No. Check item Criteria Remedy


Standard size Repair limit
Free length x Installed Installed Installed
Free length
30 Spool return spring Outside diameter length load load
417 N 333 N
54.2 x 34.8 51.2
{42.5 kg}
— {34.0 kg} If damaged or
393 N 315 N deformed, replace
31 Spool return spring 54.5 x 34.8 51.2
{40.1 kg}
— {32.1 kg} spring.
421 N 336 N
32 Spool return spring 54.6 x 34.8 51.2
{42.9 kg}
— {34.3 kg}
251 N 201 N
33 Spool return spring 54.9 x 24.2 52.0
{25.6 kg}
— {20.5 kg}

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 10-402 5


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
SEN06268-00 Control valve

(2/5)

10-402 6 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
Control valve SEN06268-00

1. Suction valve (Arm out)


2. Suction valve (R.H. travel reverse)
3. Suction valve (Boom raise)
4. Suction valve (L.H. travel reverse)
5. Safety-suction valve (Service 1)
6. Safety-suction valve (Service 2)
7. 2-stage safety-suction valve (Service 1)
8. Safety-suction valve (Arm Hi in)
9. Safety-suction valve (Bucket curl)
10. Suction valve (L.H. travel forward)
11. 2-stage safety-suction valve (Boom lower)
12. Suction valve (R.H. travel forward)
13. Safety-suction valve (Arm in)
14. LS shuttle valve (Arm)
15. LS shuttle valve (R.H. travel)
16. LS select valve
17. LS shuttle valve (Boom)
18. LS shuttle valve (L.H. travel)
19. LS shuttle valve (Bucket)
20. LS shuttle valve (Service 1)
21. LS shuttle valve (Service 2)
22. LS check valve

Unit: mm

No. Check item Criteria Remedy


Standard size Repair limit
Free length x Installed Installed Installed
Free length
23 Suction valve spring Outside diameter length load load If damaged or
5.5 N 4.4 N deformed, replace
46.8 x 7.5 40.6
{0.56 kg}
— {0.45 kg} spring.
1.5 N 1.2 N
24 Check valve spring 11.5 x 4.6 8.5
{0.15 kg}
— {0.12 kg}

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 10-402 7


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
SEN06268-00 Control valve

(3/5)

10-402 8 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
Control valve SEN06268-00

1. Unload valve
2. Safety valve (Boom raise)
3. Main relief valve
4. Lift check valve

Arm valve
5. LS shuttle valve
6. Pressure compensation valve (IN)
7. Spool
8. Safety-suction valve (IN)
9. Regeneration circuit check valve
10. Safety-suction valve (OUT)
11. Pressure compensation valve (OUT)

R.H. travel valve


12. LS shuttle valve
13. Pressure compensation valve (Forward)
14. Spool
15. Suction valve (Forward)
16. Suction valve (Reverse)
17. Pressure compensation valve (Reverse)

Swing valve
18. LS select valve
19. Pressure compensation valve (R.H.)
20. Spool
21. Pressure compensation valve (L.H.)

Unit: mm

No. Check item Criteria Remedy


Standard size Repair limit
Free length x Installed Installed Installed
Free length
22 Spool return spring Outside diameter length load load If damaged or
19.6 N 15.7 N deformed, replace
50.0 x 14.4 42.0
{2.0 kg}
— {1.6 kg} spring.
5.9 N 4.71 N
23 Check valve spring 31.5 x 10.3 19.5
{0.6 kg}
— {0.48 kg}

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 10-402 9


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
SEN06268-00 Control valve

(4/5)

10-402 10 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
Control valve SEN06268-00

1. Return spring
2. Merge-divide valve (for LS)
3. Valve (Sequence valve)
4. Spring (Sequence valve)
5. Merge-divide valve (Main)
6. Return spring

Boom valve
7. Drift prevention valve
8. LS shuttle valve
9. Pressure compensation valve (Lower)
10. Spool
11. 2-stage safety-suction valve (Lower)
12. Regeneration circuit check valve
13. Suction valve (Raise)
14. Pressure compensation valve (Raise)

L.H. travel valve


15. Merge-divider valve (travel junction valve)
16. Return spring
17. LS shuttle valve
18. Pressure compensation valve (Forward)
19. Spool
20. Suction valve (Forward)
21. Suction valve (Reverse)
22. Pressure compensation valve (Reverse)

Bucket valve
23. LS shuttle valve
24. Pressure compensation valve (Curl)
25. Spool
26. Safety-suction valve (Curl)
27. Safety-suction valve (Dump)
28. Pressure compensation valve (Dump)

Unit: mm

No. Check item Criteria Remedy


Standard size Repair limit
Free length x Installed Installed Installed
Free length
29 Spool return spring Outside diameter length load load
157 N 126 N
46.6 x 21.8 33.0
{16.0 kg}
— {12.8 kg}
250 N 200 N
30 Check valve spring 70.9 x 18.0 56.0
{25.5 kg}
— {20.4 kg}
178 N 142 N If damaged or
31 Spool return spring 64.5 x 32.3 63.0
{18.1 kg}
— {14.5 kg} deformed, replace
35.3 N 28.2 N spring.
32 Check valve spring 33.0 x 12.0 26.0
{3.6 kg}
— {2.88 kg}
13.7 N 11.0 N
33 Check valve spring 16.4 x 8.9 11.5
{1.4 kg}
— {1.12 kg}
5.9 N 4.71 N
34 Check valve spring 31.5 x 10.3 19.5
{0.6 kg}
— {0.48 kg}
50.0 N 40.0 N
35 Piston return spring 30.7 x 20.5 23.0
{5.1 kg}
— {4.08 kg}

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 10-402 11


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
SEN06268-00 Control valve

(5/5)

10-402 12 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
Control valve SEN06268-00

Boom Hi and arm Hi valve

1. Boom Hi check valve


2. Quick return valve
3. Pressure compensation valve (Arm Hi in)
4. Arm Hi spool
5. Safety-suction valve (Arm Hi in)
6. Boom Hi spool
7. Pressure compensation valve (Boom Hi raise)

Service valve 1
8. LS shuttle valve
9. Pressure compensation valve
10. Spool
11. 2-stage safety-suction valve
12. Safety-suction valve

Service valve 2
13. LS shuttle valve
14. Pressure compensation valve
15. Spool
16. Safety-suction valve
17. Unload valve
18. Main relief valve
19. LS bypass plug
20. Slow return valve

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 10-402 13


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
SEN06268-00 CLSS

CLSS 1
Outline of CLSS

Features Configuration
CLSS stands for Closed center Load Sensing Sys- q CLSS is configured with variable capacity pis-
tem, which has the following characteristics. ton pumps, control valves, and respective
actuators.
q Fine control not influenced by load q The hydraulic pump is configured with pump
q Controllability enabling digging even with fine body, PC valve and LS valve.
control
q Ease of compound operation ensured by flow
divider function using area of opening of spool
during compound operations
q Energy saving using variable pump control

10-402 14 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
CLSS SEN06268-00

Basic principle
1. Pump swash plate angle control
q The pump swash plate angle (pump delivery) q The pump swash plate angle shifts toward the
is controlled so that LS differential pressure maximum position if LS differential pressure
(EPLS) (the difference between pump pres- (EPLS) is lower than the set pressure of the
sure PP and control valve outlet port LS pres- LS valve (when the actuator load pressure is
sure PLS) (load pressure of actuator) is high).
constant. q If it becomes higher than the set pressure
q [LS differential pressure (EPLS) = Pump dis- (when the actuator load pressure is low), the
charge pressure (PP) – LS pressure (PLS)] pump swash plate angle shifts toward the mini-
mum position.

LS differential pressure ( E PLS) and pump


swash plate angle

a For details of functions, see the “Hydraulic


pump” paragraph.

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 10-402 15


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
SEN06268-00 CLSS

2. Pressure compensation control

q A pressure compensation valve is installed to


the outlet port side of the control valve to bal-
ance the load.
q When actuators are operated together, the
p r e s s u r e d i ff e r e n c e ( E P ) b e t w e e n t h e
upstream (inlet port) and downstream (outlet
port) of the spool of each valve becomes the
same regardless the size of the load (pres-
sure).
q The flow of oil from the pump is divided (com-
pensated) in proportion to the area of opening
(S1) and (S2) of each valve.

10-402 16 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
CLSS SEN06268-00

3. System diagram

a The illustration shows actuator (7) in the merge 1. Front pump


mode with stroke end at the time of relief. 2. Rear pump
3. Main relief valve
4. Unload valve
5. Merge-divider valve
6. Control valve
7. Actuator
8. Pump circuit
9. LS circuit
10. Tank circuit
11. Valve
12. Spring
13. LS bypass valve
14. LS valve
15. PC valve

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 10-402 17


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
SEN06268-00 Functions and operation by valve

Functions and operation by valve 1


Hydraulic circuit diagram and the name of valves

10-402 18 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
Functions and operation by valve SEN06268-00

1. Arm valve 36. Main relief valve (arm side)


2. R.H. travel valve Set pressure:
3. Swing valve 36.1 ± 0.25 MPa {367.5 ± 2.5 kg/cm2}
4. Boom valve (112 l/min)
5. L.H. travel valve
6. Bucket valve When digging force increased:
7. Boom Hi valve 38.2.1 ± 0.25 MPa {389.5.5 ± 2.5 kg/cm2}
8. Arm Hi valve (110 l/min)
9. Service valve 1
10. Service valve 2 37. Unload valve (bucket side)
11. Spool (arm) Cracking pressure:
12. Spool (R.H. travel) 3.1 ± 0.5 MPa {32 ± 5 kg/cm2}
13. Spool (swing)
14. Spool (boom) 38. Unload valve (arm side)
15. Spool (L.H. travel) Cracking pressure:
16. Spool (bucket) 3.1 ± 0.5 MPa {32 ± 5 kg/cm2}
17. Spool (boom Hi)
18. Spool (arm Hi) 39. Safety-suction valve (service 1)
19. Spool (service 1) Set pressure:
20. Spool (service 2) 17.2 ± 0.5 MPa {175 ± 5 kg/cm2}
21. Pressure compensation valve
22. Pressure compensation valve 40. Safety-suction valve (dump, digging or arm Hi)
23. Suction valve Set pressure:
24. Check valve (for boom regeneration circuit) 38.2 ± 0.5 MPa {390 ± 5 kg/cm2}
25. Check valve (for arm regeneration circuit)
26. LS shuttle valve 41. 2-stage safety-suction valve (service 1)
27. LS select valve Set pressure:
28. Merge-divider valve 1 stage: 20.1 ± 0.5 MPa {205 ± 5 kg/cm2}
29. Arm quick return valve 2 stage: 17.2 ± 0.5 MPa {175 ± 5 kg/cm2}
30. Self pressure reducing valve
31. Travel junction valve 42. 2-stage safety-suction valve (dump or digging)
32. Lift check valve Set pressure:
33. Boom drift prevention valve 1 stage: 28.4 ± 0.5 MPa {290 ± 5 kg/cm2}
34. Boom Hi check valve 2 stage: 14.7 ± 0.5 MPa {150 ± 5 kg/cm2}
35. Main relief valve (bucket side)
Set pressure: 43. Safety valve
36.1 ± 0.25 MPa {367.5 ± 2.5 kg/cm2} Set pressure:
(112 l/min) 38.2 ± 0.5 MPa {390 ± 5 kg/cm2}

When digging force increased:


38.2 ± 0.25 MPa {389.5.5 ± 2.5 kg/cm2}
(110 l/min)

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 10-402 19


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
SEN06268-00 Functions and operation by valve

Unload valve
1. When the unload valve is actuating

1. LS circuit 4. Tank circuit


2. Valve 5. Spring
3. Pump circuit

Function Operation
q Drains an oil discharge for the portion of the q Pressure of pump circuit (3) is received by the
minimum pump swash plate angle while all end of valve (2).
control valves are in the holding. q Since the control valve is in neutral position,
q The pump pressure will correspond to a set pressure of LS circuit (1) is 0 MPa{0 kg/cm2}.
load of spring (5) inside the valve (this pres- q Pressurized oil of pump circuit (3) stops at
sure will be P1). valve (2), and the pressure rises as no relief is
q Since LS pressure is drained from the LS available.
bypass valve, LS pressure C tank pressure C 0 q When this pressure becomes larger than the
MPa{0 kg/cm2}. force of spring (5), valve (2) moves to the left.
q Ports (b) and (c) are interconnected and the
pump pressure flows to tank circuit (4).
q The pressurized oil of LS circuit (1) passes
from orifice (a) via port (c) and is drained to the
tank circuit (4).
q When actuated, LS pressure C tank pressure.
q Since the pump discharge pressure - LS circuit
pressure during unloading is larger than the
pump LS control pressure, the signal is output
to minimize the pump swash plate angle.

10-402 20 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
Functions and operation by valve SEN06268-00

2. Operation of relief valve


q During operation (a work within a scope of dis- q When the cylinder reaches the stroke end, the
charge by a minimum swash plate angle), the main relief valve opens.
discharge pressure for the portion of minimum q The pump delivery (Q) is relieved to the
pump swash plate angle is set to LS pressure tank.(See the system diagram)
+ P1 pressure. q The pump discharge pressure (PP) and LS
q LS control differential pressure (EPLS) of dis- pressure (PLS) become approximately the
charge for the portion of minimum swash plate same as each has not flow at the upstream
angle will be equal to P1 pressure. and downstream of the spool, and LS differen-
tial pressure (EPLS) becomes 0 kg/cm2.
q As LS differential pressure (EPLS) is lower
than the LS set pressure of LS valve, LS valve
is actuated to maximize the pump swash plate
angle.
q Mechanically, operation of PC valve have the
prevalence to that of LS valve.
q The pump is held at a minimum swash plate
angle by the cut-off function of PC valve.

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 10-402 21


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
SEN06268-00 Functions and operation by valve

Introduction of LS pressure

1. Hydraulic pump
2. Main spool
3. Pressure compensation valve
4. Valve
5. Check valve
6. LS circuit
7. LS shuttle valve

Function
q Introduces the upstream pressure (down-
stream pressure of the spool meter-in) of pres-
sure compensation valve (3) and leads to LS
shuttle valve (7) as the LS pressure.
q Connected to actuator port (B) via valve (4),
and makes LS pressure C actuator load pres-
sure.
q Inlet pore (a) inside main spool (2) has a small
diameter concurrently serving as a throttle.

Operation
q When main spool (2) is operated, the pump
pressure enters port (c) via inlet pore (a) and is
led to the LS circuit.
q When the pump pressures rises to reach the
load pressure of port (B), check valve (5)
opens.

10-402 22 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
Functions and operation by valve SEN06268-00

LS bypass plug

1. Hydraulic pump
2. Main spool
3. Pressure compensation valve
4. LS shuttle valve
5. LS bypass plug
6. LS circuit

Function
q Releases the residual pressure in LS pressure
circuit (6) from orifices (a) and (b).
q Slows down the rising rate of LS pressure to
prevent a sudden change of hydraulic pres-
sure.
q Bypass flow from LS bypass plug (5) causes a
pressure loss to be generated due to the circuit
resistance between throttle (c) of main spool
(2) and LS shuttle valve (4).
q Effective LS differential pressure drops to
improve a dynamic stability of the actuator.

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 10-402 23


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
SEN06268-00 Functions and operation by valve

Pressure compensation valve


1. During independent operation and under maximum load pressure

(If the load pressure is higher than other work equipment during a combined operation)

1. Hydraulic pump 4. Piston


2. Valve 5. Spring
3. Shuttle valve 6. LS shuttle valve

Function q As principle, port (C) and spring chamber (E)


q Pressure compensation valve works as the are not interconnected in an integrated pres-
load check valve. sure compensation valve.
q If the pump pressure (LS pressure) is lower q If high peak pressure is generated at port (C),
than the load at port (c), shuttle valve (3) in valve (7) does not collide with the valve cham-
pressure compensation valve piston (4) inter- ber.
connects spring chamber (E) and port (C). q With a bucket valve, etc., port (C) and spring
q The force of spring (5) operates piston (4) and chamber (E) are designed to interconnect
valve (2) to the closing direction. before valve (7) is seated.

Integrated pressure compensation valve


q High stress may occur when valve (2) collides
with valve chamber seat portion (C) if a high
peak pressure is generated in the actuator cir-
cuit or repetitive peak pressure occurs continu-
ously (example: when using the breaker).
q To prevent this, a pressure compensation
valve with integrated valve (2) and piston (4) is
used.
q With the present machine, this device is
adopted for the bucket valve (cylinder bottom)
and the service valve.

10-402 24 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
Functions and operation by valve SEN06268-00

2. When compensated

(If the load pressure is lower than other work equipment during a combined operation)

Function
q The pressure compensation valve closes
under LS pressure of port (D), and the spool
meter-in downstream pressure of port (B)
becomes equivalent to the maximum pressure
of other work equipment.
q Since the spool meter-in upstream pressure of
port (A) is the pump pressure, the spool meter-
in differential pressure [upstream pressure port
(A) pressure] - downstream pressure [port (B)
pressure] becomes equivalent to all the spools
in operation.
q Pump flow is divided according to the ratio of
the meter-in opening area.

Operation
q Spring chamber (E) is interconnected to port
(D).
q Piston (4) and valve (2) operate in the closing
direction (to the right) under the LS circuit pres-
sure from other work equipment of port (F).
q Valve upstream pressure (= spool meter-in
downstream pressure) of port (B) is controlled
with LS pressure.

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 10-402 25


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
SEN06268-00 Functions and operation by valve

3. Pressure compensation valve area ratio

Function
q The state of division changes according to the
area ratio of pressure compensation portion
(A1) and (A2). Area ratio = (A2)/(A1)
q If area ratio = 1 : the spool meter-in down-
stream pressure will be equal to the maximum
load pressure, and the pressure will be divided
according to the opening area ratio.
q If area ratio = 1 or over : the spool meter-in
downstream pressure will be greater than the
maximum load pressure, and the pressure will
be divided smaller than the opening area ratio.
q If area ratio = 1 or under : the spool meter-in
downstream pressure will be smaller than the
maximum load pressure, and the pressure will
be divided greater than the opening area ratio.

10-402 26 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
Functions and operation by valve SEN06268-00

Pressure compensation valve inner shuttle valve


1. If holding pressure at port (A) is larger than LS pressure in the springing chamber (B)

1. Hydraulic pump
2. Valve
3. Pressure compensation valve inner shuttle
valve
4. Piston

Function
q Shuttle valve (3) is pushed to the right by port
(A) pressure and cuts off interconnection
between ports (A) and (C).
q Holding pressure at port (A) is led to the spring
chamber (B) to push piston (4) to the left so
that piston (4) and valve (2) will not be sepa-
rated.

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 10-402 27


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
SEN06268-00 Functions and operation by valve

2. In the case of travel

Outline
q Since no holding pressure is generated at port
(A) of the travel circuit, a pressure compensa-
tion valve without shuttle valve (3) is adopted.

10-402 28 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
Functions and operation by valve SEN06268-00

Boom regeneration circuit


1. If the cylinder head pressure is lower than the bottom pressure (free fall, etc.)

1. Hydraulic pump
2. Boom spool
3. Pressure compensation valve
4. Safety-suction valve
5. Suction valve
6. Check valve
7. LS shuttle valve

Function Operation
q Provides the regeneration circuit from the cyl- q If the cylinder head pressure is lower than the
inder bottom to the cylinder head when the bottom pressure, pressurized oil (A) from the
boom is lowered and increases flow to the cyl- cylinder bottom flows to drain circuit (B) from
inder bottom. the notch of boom spool (2).
q On the other hand, remaining oil flows to
regeneration circuit (C), opens check valve (6)
and flows to the cylinder head via circuit (D).
q Flow from regeneration circuit (C) and pump
(1) merges in circuit (E).

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 10-402 29


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
SEN06268-00 Functions and operation by valve

2. If the cylinder head pressure is higher than the bottom pressure (digging work, etc.)

Function
q Check valve (6) provided to regeneration cir-
cuit (C) closes to shut off the flow from the cyl-
inder bottom to the head.

10-402 30 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
Functions and operation by valve SEN06268-00

Arm regeneration circuit


1. If the cylinder head pressure is higher than the bottom pressure

1. Hydraulic pump
2. Arm spool
3. Pressure compensation valve
4. Safety-suction valve
5. Suction valve
6. Check valve
7. LS shuttle valve

Function Operation
q During arm digging, regeneration circuit pro- q If the cylinder head pressure is lower than the
vided from the cylinder head to the bottom bottom pressure, pressurized oil (A) from the
increases the cylinder speed as the cylinder cylinder bottom flows to drain circuit (B) from
flow involves the pump delivery plus regener- the notch of arm spool (2).
ated flow. q On the other hand, remaining oil flows to
regeneration circuit (C), opens check valve (6)
and flows to the cylinder head via circuit (D).
q Flow from regeneration circuit (C) and pump
(1) merges in circuit (E).

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 10-402 31


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
SEN06268-00 Functions and operation by valve

2. If the cylinder head pressure is lower than the bottom pressure

Function
q Check valve (6) provided to regeneration cir-
cuit (C) closes to shut off the flow from the cyl-
inder bottom to the head.

10-402 32 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
Merge-divider valve SEN06268-00

Merge-divider valve 1
1. When flows from the pumps merge [if pilot pressure (PS) is OFF]

1. Main spool 5. LS circuit (bucket side)


2. Spring 6. LS circuit (bucket side)
3. LS spool 7. LS circuit (arm side)
4. Spring 8. LS circuit (arm side)

Function Operation
q Merges pressurized oil (P1) and (P2) dis- q Since pilot pressure (PS) is OFF, output pres-
charged from the 2 pumps or divides (to sure from PPC valve is 0 kg/cm2.
respective control valve group). q Main spool (1) is pressed to the right by spring
q Merges and divides LS circuit pressure. (2) and ports (E) and (F) are interconnected.
q Merges pressurized oil (P1) and (P2) dis-
charged from the 2 pumps at ports (E) and (F)
and sends to necessary control valve.
q Since pilot pressure (PS) is OFF for LS spool
(3), it is pressed to the right by spring (4), then
ports (A) and (D), ports (B) and (C) are inter-
connected respectively.
q Forwards LS pressure led from respective con-
trol valve spools to LS circuits (5), (6), (7) and
(8) to all the pressure compensation valves.

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 10-402 33


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
SEN06268-00 Merge-divider valve

2. When flows from the pumps are divided [if pilot pressure (PS) is ON]

Operation
q Pilot pressure (PS) turns ON, and output pres-
sure from the PPC valve shifts main spool (1)
to the left, and ports (E) and (F) are divided.
q Pressurized oil discharged from the 2 pumps
are sent to respective control valves.

P1 pressure: To bucket, L.H. travel, and boom


P2 pressure: To swing, R.H. travel, and arm

q LS spool (3) too shifts to the left under the out-


put pressure from the PPC valve, intercon-
nects ports (A) and (C) and divides other ports.
q Forwards LS pressure led from each control
valve spool to LS circuits (5), (6), (7) and (8) to
respective control valves.

10-402 34 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
Merge-divider valve SEN06268-00

LS select valve

Function Operation
q Prevents high LS pressure from the swinging 1. If pilot pressure (BP) is OFF
from entering the LS circuit of work valves q Since pilot pressure (BP) is OFF, piston (3) is
while the swinging and work equipment are in pressed to the left by spring (2).
combined operation. q When swing-operated, swing LS pressure (P1)
q Prevents high pressure generated during enters port (A) after passing swing spool (5).
swing drive and improves operability of work q Valve (1) is pressed to the left and ports (A)
equipment. and (B) are interconnected.
q Swing LS pressure (P1) flows to LS shuttle
valve (8).

2. If pilot pressure (BP) is ON


q If pilot pressure (BP) is ON, BP pressure con-
tracts spring (2), and piston (3) shifts to the
right.
q Valve (1) is pressed to the right and intercon-
nection between ports (A) and (B) is closed.
q Swing LS pressure (P1) stops flowing to LS
shuttle valve (8).
q If swing LS pressure (P1) rises, other LS cir-
cuits are not affected.

a The illustration shows the state of simulta-


neous operation of swinging and R.H. travel.
[(BP) pressure ON]

1. Valve
2. Spring
3. Piston
4. Piston
5. Swing spool
6. L.H. travel spool
7. Arm spool
8. LS shuttle valve
9. LS circuit

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 10-402 35


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
SEN06268-00 Merge-divider valve

Self pressure reducing valve

Function
q Reduces the discharge pressure of the main
pump and supplies it as control pressure for
the solenoid valves, EPC valves, etc.

Operation
1. While engine is stopped
q Poppet (11) is pressed by spring (12) against
the seat and port (PR) is not connected to
(TS).
q Valve (14) is pressed by spring (13) against the
left side and port (P2) is connected to (TS).
q Valve (7) is pressed by spring (8) against the
left side and port (P2) is closed to (A2).

10-402 36 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
Merge-divider valve SEN06268-00

2. During neutral and when load pressure (P2) 3. When load pressure (P2) is high
is low q Load pressure (A2) increases with the opera-
a When load pressure (A2) is lower than self tion of digging, etc., and the pump discharge
pressure reducing valve output pressure (PR) increases accordingly.
q Pressure (P2) increases to [(φd area x P2 pres-
q Valve (7) is pressed to the closing direction of sure) = force of spring (8) + ( φ d area x PR
circuit between ports (P2) and (A2) by spring pressure)]., and valve (7) moves to the right to
(8) and under pressure (PR) (which is 0 MPa the stroke end.
{0 kg/cm2}). q As a result, opening between ports (P2) and
q When pressurized oil flows in from port (P2), a (A2) increases, and the pass resistance
balance is reached due to [(φd area x P2 pres- reduces, reducing the engine horsepower loss.
sure) = force of spring (8) + ( φ d area x PR q When pressure (PR) rises above the set pres-
pressure)]. sure, poppet (11) opens.
q Adjusts valve (7) opening to keep pressure q Pressurized oil flows from port (PR) to orifice
(P2) at a constant level over pressure (PR). (a) in spool (14), then flows to seal drain port
q When pressure (PR) rises above the set pres- (TS) from poppet (11) opening.
sure, poppet (11) opens. q Differential pressure is generated before and
q Pressurized oil flows from port (PR) to orifice after orifice (a) in spool (14) and then spool
(a) in spool (14), then flows to seal drain port (14) moves to close the pass between ports
(TS) from poppet (11) opening. (P2) and (PR).
q Differential pressure is generated before and q Pressure (P2) is reduced by the opening at this
after orifice (a) in spool (14) and then spool time and adjusted to a constant pressure (the
(14) moves to close the pass between ports set pressure) and supplied as pressure (PR).
(P2) and (PR).
q Pressure (P2) is reduced by the opening at this
time and adjusted to a constant pressure (the
set pressure) and supplied as pressure (PR).

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 10-402 37


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
SEN06268-00 Merge-divider valve

4. When abnormally high pressure is gener-


ated
q If pressure (PR) of self pressure reducing
valve becomes abnormally high, ball (16) con-
tracts spring (15) and becomes separated from
the seat.
q Allows the pressurized oil to (TS) from port
(PR) and lowers pressure (PR).
q Protects PPC valve, solenoid valve and other
devices from abnormal pressure.

10-402 38 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
Merge-divider valve SEN06268-00

Travel junction valve


1. When pilot pressure is turned ON

Function Operation
q This valve connects the L.H. and R.H. travel q Pilot pressure from the travel junction solenoid
circuits via travel junction valve so that the valve contracts spring (1), and travel junction
hydraulic oil will be supplied evenly to both spool (2) moves to the left to the stroke end.
travel motors to improve machine's straight q Junction circuit between port (PTL) (L.H. travel
travel performance. circuit) and port (PTR) (R.H. travel circuit) is
q When the machine is steered, outside pilot closed.
pressure (PST) closes the travel junction valve
to improve steering performance.

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 10-402 39


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
SEN06268-00 Merge-divider valve

2. When pilot pressure is turned OFF

Operation
q If pilot pressure (PST) from the solenoid valve q If the oil flow rates to the L.H. and R.H. travel
is 0, travel junction spool (2) is pressed by the motors become different from each other, the
force of spring (1) against the right side and oil flows through the route between port (PTL),
the pass between ports (PTL) and (PTR) is travel junction spool (2), and port (PTR) so that
open. the oil flow rates to both motors will be equal-
ized again.

10-402 40 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
Merge-divider valve SEN06268-00

Travel PPC shuttle valve


1. When travel lever is in neutral

Function Operation
q Regulates flow to each cylinder by controlling q The oil in stroke regulation signal chamber (a)
the stroke of each spool of the boom, arm, and is drained through orifices (5) and (6) of pis-
bucket using the pilot pressure of travel PPC tons (3) and (4) in the travel spring case and
valve while climbing a steep grade, raising the the travel PPC valve.
boom, digging with arm, dumping, bucket-dig- q When operated for boom raising (or arm dig-
ging or operating dump. ging, dumping, bucket digging, dumping),
q When controlling the stroke of the boom, arm spool (1) moves to the left until it makes con-
and/or bucket, pilot pressure of travel PPC tact with the end face of spring casing (2) (st0).
valve passes through the circuit inside the con-
trol valves to actuate the system.

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 10-402 41


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
SEN06268-00 Merge-divider valve

2. When traveling

Operation
q If the right travel lever is set in the reverse (or q Maximum stroke of the spool is limited to (st1)
forward) direction, pilot pressure from the PPC for the amount of movement (st2) of piston (8)
valve presses spool (7) to the left (or right). to the right.
q Spool (7) pushes piston (3) to close orifice (5)
and shut off stroke regulation signal chamber
(a) and the drain circuit of the travel PPC
valve.
q At this time, the right travel reverse (or forward)
lever is set, PPC pressure is applied through
orifice (6) of piston (4) to the left end of piston
(8) to push piston (8) to the right.
q When operated for boom raising (or arm IN,
OUT, bucket CURL, DUMP), spool (1) moves
to the left.

10-402 42 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
Merge-divider valve SEN06268-00

Boom drift prevention valve


1. When raising boom

Function
q This valve prevents the oil in the boom cylinder
bottom from leaking through spool (1) and the
boom from lowering under its weight while the
boom lever is not operated.

Operation
q When the boom is raised, pressurized oil from
the control valve works on the ring-shaped
area (S)[= φ(d1) area – φ(d2) area] caused by
the difference between outside diameter (d1)
of poppet (5) and seat diameter (d2) to move it
to the left.
q Contracts spring (4) and poppet (5) moves to
the left.
q As a result, pressurized oil from the control
valve passes through the opening of poppet
(5) and flows to the bottom end of the boom
cylinder.

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 10-402 43


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
SEN06268-00 Merge-divider valve

2. When the boom is in neutral

Operation
q Moves the lever to neutral with the boom
raised.
q Pressurized oil flown inside poppet (5) from
orifice (a) of poppet (5) is closed by pilot piston
(2).
q The holding pressure of boom cylinder bottom
works on the ring-shaped area (S) caused by
the difference between outside diameter (d1)
of poppet (5) and seat diameter (d2) to move it
to the right.
q The sum of this force and the force of spring
(4) closes poppet (5).
q Pressurized oil from the control valve and the
holding pressure of the boom cylinder bottom
are shut off.

10-402 44 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
Merge-divider valve SEN06268-00

3. When lowering boom

Operation
q When the boom is lowered, pilot pressure from
the PPC valve presses pilot spool (2).
q Pressurized oil in chamber (b) inside the pop-
pet is drained via orifice (c).
q Pressurized oil of the boom bottom flows to ori-
fice (a) o chamber (b) o orifice (c) o drain (T),
and the pressurized oil in chamber (b) lowers.
q As the pressure of chamber (b) lowers under
the pressure of port (B), poppet (5) opens.
q Pressurized oil from port (B) is led to port (A)
and then flows to the control valve.

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 10-402 45


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
SEN06268-00 Merge-divider valve

Arm drift prevention valve


(if equipped)

1. When arm OUT

Function
q This valve prevents the oil in the arm head
from leaking through spool (1) and the boom
from lowering under its weight while the arm
lever is not operated.

Operation
q When the arm OUT is operated, pressurized
oil from the control valve works on the ring-
shaped area (S)[= φ (d1) area – φ (d2) area]
caused by the difference between the outside
diameter (d1) of poppet (5) and the seat diam-
eter (d2) to move it to the left.
q Contracts spring (4) and poppet (5) moves to
the left.
q As a result, pressurized oil from the control
valve passes through the opening of poppet
(5) and flows to the arm cylinder head.

10-402 46 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
Merge-divider valve SEN06268-00

2. When the arm is in neutral

Operation
q Moves the lever to neutral with the arm
dumped.
q Pressurized oil flown inside poppet (5) from
orifice (a) of poppet (5) is closed by pilot piston
(2).
q The holding pressure of arm cylinder head
works on ring-shaped area (S) caused by the
difference between outside diameter (d1) of
poppet (5) and seat diameter (d2) to move it to
the right.
q The sum of this force and the force of spring
(4) closes poppet (5).
q Pressurized oil from the control valve and the
holding pressure of the arm cylinder head are
shut off.

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 10-402 47


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
SEN06268-00 Merge-divider valve

3. When arm IN

Operation
q When the arm IN is operated, pilot spool (2) is
pushed under the pilot pressure from the PPC
valve.
q Pressurized oil in chamber (b) inside the pop-
pet is drained via orifice (c).
q Pressurized oil of the arm head flows to orifice
(a) o chamber (b) o orifice (c) o drain (T), and
the pressurized oil in chamber (b) lowers.
q As the pressure of chamber (b) lowers under
the pressure of port (B), poppet (5) opens.
q Pressurized oil from port (B) is led to port (A)
and then flows to the control valve.

10-402 48 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
Merge-divider valve SEN06268-00

4. When abnormally high pressure is generated

q If abnormally high pressure is generated in the q If arm drift prevention valve (optional) is
boom cylinder bottom circuit, the pressurized installed to the arm cylinder head circuit, the
oil in port (B) pushes check valve (6) open, boom cylinder bottom circuit pressure force or
then safety valve (3) operates. arm cylinder head circuit pressure force,
whichever having higher pressurized oil,
pushes check valve (6) or (6A) open to actuate
safety valve (3).

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 10-402 49


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
SEN06268-00 Merge-divider valve

Quick return valve


1. When arm OUT

Function
q When arm OUT, large volume of oil returns
from the cylinder bottom.
q Reduces this pressure loss.

Operation
q When the arm OUT is operated, pilot spool (1) increases by the sum of the pressure receiving
is pushed under the pilot pressure from the force of pressure receiving portion[φd1 area
PPC valve. (S1)] on the chamber (b) side of valve (2) and
q Pressurized oil in chamber (b) inside the valve the spring force.
is drained via orifice (c). q Or (φd2 pressure receiving force > φd1 pres-
q Pressurized oil of the arm bottom side flows to sure receiving force + spring force)
orifice (a) o chamber (b) o orifice (c) o drain q Valve (2) is pressed to the left and pressurized
(T), and the pressure in chamber (b) lowers. oil is led from port (A) to (B).
q If the pressure of chamber (b) drops lower than q From port (B), pressurized oil is drained
that of port (A), pressure receiving force of the directly to the tank.
pressure receiving portion [φd2 area (S2) (seat
d ia m e t e r a r e a ) ] o n t h e s i d e o f p o r t ( A )

10-402 50 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
Merge-divider valve SEN06268-00

2. When the arm is in neutral

Operation
q Returning the lever to neutral reduces the pilot
pressure from the PPC valve to 0 kg/cm2.
q The pressurized oil that has flowed and been
drained through orifice (a) in valve (2) is closed
by pilot piston (1).
q The holding pressure on the arm bottom side
works on the difference between areas (S2)
and (S1) of valve (2) to the right.
q Valve (2) is closed by the total of this force and
the force of spring (3), so ports (A) and (B) are
shut off.

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 10-402 51


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
SEN06268-00 Merge-divider valve

Lift check valve


Function When engin is running (during swing or travel
q This valve creates back pressure in the drain operation)
circuit to prevent cavitation caused by negative q The pressurized oil (PR) from self-pressure
pressure in each actuator circuit (motors, cylin-
reducing valve (1) flows to variable back pres-
ders, etc).
sure solenoid valve (3).
q In order to reduce output loss, this valve
q Since drive signal (IS3) of variable back pres-
reduces the back pressure in the drain circuit
sure solenoid valve (3) is "OFF", pressurized
when any operation other than the travel and
oil (PR) is flown to spring chamber (C) of vari-
swing is performed.
able back pressure valve (4).
q Pressurized oil (PR) transmitted to spring
Operation
chamber (C) exerts a force on the left end face
When engine is stopped of valve (6) (surface of φd), and it pushes valve
q Pressurized oil is not supplied from the main (6) to the right as a combined force with the
pump to self-pressure reducing valve (1). reaction force of spring (5).
q No oil pressure is transmitted from variable q Pressure (PA) of drain circuit (A) of the control
back pressure solenoid valve (3) to spring valve acts on the right end face of valve (6)
chamber (C), and valve (6) is pressed to the (surface of φd1) to push valve (6) to the left.
right by the reaction force of spring (5). q Valve (6) balances at a position where it cre-
q Drain circuit (A) of the control valve is intercon- ates back pressure (PA) determined as fol-
nected to port (T) through orifice (b) of valve lows; PA=(Area of surface φd) x Pressure (PR)
(6). + Reaction force of spring (5) / Area of surface
φd1.
q Accordingly, the oil flow rate from drain circuit
(A) of the control valve to port (T) is limited. In
other words, the set pressure of variable back
pressure valve (4) is adjusted.

10-402 52 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
Merge-divider valve SEN06268-00

When engin is running (during swing or travel


operation)
q The pressurized oil from self-pressure reduc-
ing valve (1) flows to variable back pressure
solenoid valve (3).
q Since drive signal (IS3) of variable back pres-
sure solenoid valve (3) is "ON", pressurized oil
(PR) from self-pressure reducing valve (1)
flown to spring chamber (C) of variable back
pressure valve (4) is drained through variable
back pressure solenoid valve (3).
q Only the reaction force of spring (5) pushes
valve (6) to the right.
q Pressure (PA) of drain circuit (A) of the control
valve acts on the right end face of valve (6)
(surface of φd1) to push valve (6) to the left.
q Valve (6) balances at a position where it cre-
ates back pressure (PA) determined as fol-
lows; PA=Reaction force of spring (5) / Area of
surface φd1.
q Accordingly, the oil flow rate from drain circuit
(A) of the control valve to port (T) is limited. In
other words, the set pressure of variable back
pressure valve (4) is adjusted.

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 10-402 53


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
SEN06268-00 Merge-divider valve

Main relief valve

1. Spring
2. Poppet

Function
q Set pressure of the relief valve is in 2 stages.
q When power is needed, pilot pressure (P) is
turned ON and the set pressure becomes
higher.

Operation
q The set pressure of relief valve is determined
by spring (1) installed load. (1st stage)
q Respective setting is not required for both the
1st and 2nd stages. Setting the 1st stage com-
pletes the setting of the 2nd stage.

1. If pilot pressure (P) is OFF: Low-pressure


setting
Set pressure is determined by spring (1)
installed load.

2. If pilot pressure (P) is ON: High-pressure


setting
Spring (1) installed load is added with pilot
pressure (P) applied to the area of poppet
diameter (d1), raising the set pressure to
higher level.

10-402 54 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
Merge-divider valve SEN06268-00

2-stage safety-suction valve


[Installed to port (B) on the boom cylinder head side and port (B) of the service valve]

1. Spring
2. Piston
3. Spring
4. Holder

Function Operation
q Enables to provide the safety valve set pres- q The safety set pressure is determined by
sure in 2 stages, and make the low-pressure spring (1) installed load.
setting smaller.
q Enables to relieve a load without lever opera- 1. If pilot pressure is OFF (high-pressure set-
tion if high load is applied to the cylinder. ting)
q Improves work efficiency and reduces machine q Since pilot pressure (P) is OFF, piston (2) is
body vibration. pressed to the left by spring (3). [Spring (1)
installed load < spring (3) installed load]
q Spring (1) installed load becomes maximum
and the set pressure rises.
q Passage (B) is interconnected to the drain cir-
cuit via passage (C) and chamber (D).

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 10-402 55


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
SEN06268-00 Merge-divider valve

2. If pilot pressure is ON (low-pressure set-


ting)
q If the pilot pressure (P) is ON, the pilot pres-
sure is led to section (A) via passage (B).
q Piston (2) works on the pressure-receiving
bore portion [(d2) – (d1)] of section A.
q This pilot pressure contracts spring (3), and
piston (2) moves to the right until making con-
tact with holder (4).
q Spring (1) stretches, installed load is reduced,
and the set pressure lowers.
q Pressurized oil proportionate to the piston
stroke is drained via passage (C) and chamber
(D).

10-402 56 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
Attachment circuit selector valve SEN06268-00

Attachment circuit selector valve 1

ACC: To accumulator 1. Spool


ATT: To attachment 2. Spring
P1: From attachment selector solenoid valve
T: To hydraulic oil tank
TS: To hydraulic oil tank
V: To control valve

Unit: mm

No. Check item Criteria Remedy


Standard size Repair limit
Free length x Installed Installed Installed If damaged or
Free length
3 Spool return spring Outside diameter length load load deformed, replace
834 N 667 N spring.
132 x 29 114.5
{85.0 kg}
— {68.0 kg}

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 10-402 57


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
SEN06268-00 Attachment circuit selector valve

Function
q When a breaker is installed, the return oil from
the breaker does not pass through the main
valve, but returns directly to the hydraulic tank.
q When other attachments (crusher, etc.) are
installed, the attachment and the main valve
are interconnected.

Operation
1. When attachment other than breaker is 2. When breaker is installed
installed q Pilot pressure from the attachment circuit
q Spool (1) is pressed to the left by the force of selector solenoid valve contracts spring (2),
spring (2). and spool (1) moves to the right to the stroke
q Ports (ATT) and (V) are interconnected and end.
ports (ATT) and (T) are shut off. Attachment is q Ports (ATT) and (V) are shut off and ports
thus interconnected to the control valve. (ATT) and (T) are interconnected.
q Pressurized oil returning from the breaker
returns directly to the hydraulic tank via port (T)
without passing through the control valve.

10-402 58 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
Attachment circuit selector valve SEN06268-00

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 10-402 59


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
SEN06268-00 Hydraulic drift prevention valve

Hydraulic drift prevention valve 1


(For the boom and arm)

10-402 60 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
Hydraulic drift prevention valve SEN06268-00

CY: To work equipment cylinder


PCY: For pressure pickup port and equalizer circuit
PI: From PPC valve
T: To tank
V: From control valve

1. Pilot spool
2. Spring (1st stage spool)
3. Spring (2nd stage spool)
4. Safety valve
5. Check valve
6. Spring

Unit: mm
No. Check item Criteria Remedy
Standard size Repair limit
Free length x Installed Installed Installed
Free length
7 Check valve spring Outside diameter length load load
12.7 N 10.2 N
20.8 x 12.2 13.5
{1.3 kg}
— {1.04 kg} If damaged or
58.8 N 47.1 N deformed, replace
8 Spool return spring 41.1 x 9.6 35.0
{6.0 kg}
— {4.8 kg} spring.
78.5 N 62.8 N
9 Spool return spring 41.9 x 25.8 41.0
{8.0 kg}
— {6.4 kg}
181 N 145 N
10 Spool return spring 44.6 x 25.6 41.0
{18.5 kg}
— {14.8 kg}

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 10-402 61


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
SEN06268-00 Hydraulic drift prevention valve

Function
q Prevents the pressurized oil from reversing
from the work equipment cylinder and the latter
from a sudden drop if the piping bursts
between the control valve and the work equip-
ment cylinder.

Operation
1. When the work equipment lever is in neutral

When the piping is free of burst If the piping is bursted


q Check valve (5) is closed under the holding q If piping (A) bursts between the control valve
pressure of the cylinder led from port (CY) to and the work equipment cylinder, chambers (a)
chamber (b). and (b) are shut off same as when the piping
q Pilot pressure led to port (PI) from the PPC has no burst.
valve when in neutral is 0 MPa {0 kg/cm2}. q Pressure for the work equipment cylinder is
q Spool (1) is pressed to the left by the force of held to prevent a sudden drop of the work
springs (2) and (3) equipment.
q Chambers (a) and (b) are shut off.
q No pressurized oil flows between the control
valve and the work equipment cylinder.
q Accordingly, the work equipment is held in
position.
q If the work equipment cylinder has abnormally
high pressure, safety valve (4) is actuated by
the holding pressure of the work equipment
cylinder.
q Chambers (b) of L.H. and R.H. hydraulic drift
prevention valve for the boom are intercon-
nected by port (PCY).
q Chambers (b) will have the same pressure if
the L.H. and R.H. hydraulic drift prevention
valves have a difference in leakage.

10-402 62 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
Hydraulic drift prevention valve SEN06268-00

2. When pressurized oil flows from the main valve to the cylinder

When the piping is free of burst


q Pressurized oil led to chamber (a) from the
control valve becomes higher than the com-
bined force of pressure from work equipment
cylinder circuit chamber (b) and spring (6).
q Check valve (5) opens and chambers (a) and
(b) are interconnected.
q Pressurized oil flows from the control valve to
the work equipment cylinder.

If the piping is bursted


q If piping (A) bursts between the control valve
and the work equipment cylinder, pressurized
oil in chamber (a) flows outside from the
bursted portion.
q Pressure force in chamber (a) drops.
q Pressure force in chamber (a) drops lower than
the combined pressure force of chamber (b)
and spring (6).
q Check valve (5) closes and chambers (a) and
(b) are cut off.
q Pressure for the work equipment cylinder is
held to prevent a sudden drop of the work
equipment.

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 10-402 63


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
SEN06268-00 Hydraulic drift prevention valve

3. When returning pressurized oil to the main valve from the work equipment cylinder

When the piping is free of burst If the piping is bursted


q Holding pressure of the work equipment cylin- q If piping (A) bursts between the control valve
der is led to chamber (b) and check valve (5) and the work equipment cylinder.
closes. q Pressurized oil in chamber (a) flows out to the
q Pilot pressure from the PPC valve is led to port bursted portion but resupplied from chamber
(PI) and reaches [Pilot Pressure > Force of (b).
Spring (3)] (area of d). q Since pressurized oil flows via opening (c) of
q Spool (1) moves to the right to the standby spool (1), a sudden drop of the cylinder is pre-
position. (1st stage stroke) vented.
q At this point, chambers (a) and (b) are not
interconnected.
q Pilot pressure further rises, and reaches [Pilot
pressure > Force of spring (2)] (area of d).
q Spool (1) moves further to the right, and cham-
bers (a) and (b) are interconnected. (2nd stage
stroke)
q Pressurized oil returns to the control valve
from the work equipment cylinder.

10-402 64 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
Hydraulic drift prevention valve SEN06268-00

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 10-402 65


SEN06268-00

PC300-8M0, PC300LC-8M0, PC350-8M0, PC350LC-8M0 HYDRAULIC EXCAVATOR

Form No. SEN06268-00

© 2013 KOMATSU
All Rights Reserved
Printed in Japan 01-13 (01)

10-402 66
SEN06269-00

HYDRAULIC EXCAVATOR 1SHOP MANUAL

PC300-8M0
PC300LC-8M0
PC350-8M0
PC350LC-8M0

Machine model Serial number


PC300-8M0 80001 and up
PC300LC-8M0 80001 and up
PC350-8M0 80001 and up
PC350LC-8M0 80001 and up

10 Structure, function and


maintenance standard 1
403 Hydraulic system, Part 3
Valve control................................................................................................................................................... 2
PPC valve ...................................................................................................................................................... 4
Solenoid valve.............................................................................................................................................. 24
PPC accumulator ......................................................................................................................................... 26
Return oil filter .............................................................................................................................................. 27
Center swivel joint ........................................................................................................................................ 28
Travel motor ................................................................................................................................................. 29
Swing motor ................................................................................................................................................. 41
Work equipment cylinder.............................................................................................................................. 50

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 10-403 1


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
SEN06269-00 Valve control

Valve control 1

10-403 2 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
Valve control SEN06269-00

1. Travel PPC valve Lever positions


2. Service PPC valve A. Hold
3. Service pedal B. Boom (RAISE)
4. L.H. travel lever C. Boom (LOWER)
5. R.H travel lever D. Bucket (DUMP)
6. R.H. PPC valve E. Bucket (CURL)
7. R.H. work equipment control lever F. Hold
8. Solenoid block G. Arm (IN)
9. Accumulator H. Arm (OUT)
10. Control valve J. Swing (RIGHT)
11. Hydraulic pump K. Swing (LEFT)
12. Junction box L. Neutral
13. L.H. work equipment control lever M. Travel (REVERSE)
14. L.H. PPC valve N. Travel (FORWARD)

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 10-403 3


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
SEN06269-00 PPC valve

PPC valve 1
PPC: Abbreviation for Proportional Pressure Control

Work equipment and swing PPC valve 1

P: From self pressure reducing valve


P1: L.H. PPC valve: Arm OUT port/R.H. PPC valve: Boom LOWER port
P2: L.H. PPC valve: Arm IN port/R.H. PPC valve: Boom RAISE port
P3: L.H. PPC valve: Swing LEFT port/R.H. PPC valve: Bucket CURL port
P4: L.H. PPC valve: Swing RIGHT port/R.H. PPC valve: Bucket DUMP port
T: To hydraulic tank

10-403 4 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
PPC valve SEN06269-00

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 10-403 5


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
SEN06269-00 PPC valve

1. Spool
2. Piston
3. Disc
4. Nut (for lever connection)
5. Joint
6. Plate
7. Retainer
8. Body
9. Filter

Unit: mm

No. Check item Criteria Remedy


Standard dimension Repair limit
Free length Load at Load at
Installed
Centering spring x Outside installed Free length installed
10 (for ports P3 and P4) diameter
length
length length
If damaged or
17.7 N 14.1 N
42.5 x 15.5 34.0 — deformed,
{1.80 kg} {1.44 kg}
replace spring.
Centering spring 29.4 N 23.5 N
11 (for ports P1 and P2) 44.5 x 15.5 34.0
{3.0 kg}

{2.40 kg}
16.7 N 13.3 N
12 Metering spring 26.5 x 8.15 24.9
{1.70 kg}

{1.36 kg}

10-403 6 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
PPC valve SEN06269-00

Operation q The relationship of the position of spool (1) and


body (10) [fine control hole (f) is in the middle
1. When in neutral between drain chamber (D) and pump pres-
q Ports (A) and (B) of the control valve and ports sure chamber (PP)] does not change until
(P1) and (P2) of the PPC valve are connected retainer (9) contacts spool (1).
to drain chamber (D) through fine control hole q Metering spring (2) contracts in proportion to
(f) in spool (1). the stroke of the control lever.
q Pressure at port (P1) also rises in proportion to
the stroke of the control lever.
q In this way, the control valve spool moves to a
position where the pressure of chamber (A)
(same as pressure at port (P1)) and the force
of the return spring of the control valve spool
are balanced.

2. During fine control


(Neutral o fine control)
q When piston (4) is pushed by disc (5), retainer
(9) is pushed, spool (1) is also pushed by
metering spring (2), and moves down.
q When fine control hole (f) is shut off from drain
chamber (D), it is almost simultaneously inter-
connected to pump pressure chamber (PP).
q Pilot pressurized oil of the control pump is led
to port (A) from port (P1) through fine control
hole (f).
q When the pressure at port (P1) becomes
higher, spool (1) is pushed back and fine con-
trol hole (f) is shut off from pump pressure
chamber (PP). At almost the same time, it is
connected to drain chamber (D) to release the
pressure at port (P1).
q As a result, spool (1) moves up and down until
the force of metering spring (2) is balanced
with the pressure at port (P1).

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 10-403 7


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
SEN06269-00 PPC valve

3. During fine control 4. At full stroke


(When control lever is returned) q Disc (5) pushes down piston (4), and retainer
q When disc (5) starts to be returned, spool (1) is (9) pushes down spool (1).
pushed up by the force of centering spring (3) q Fine control hole (f) is shut off from drain
and the pressure at port (P1). chamber (D), and is interconnected to pump
q Because of this, fine control hole (f) is con- pressure chamber (PP).
nected to drain chamber (D), and the pressur- q Therefore, the pilot pressure oil from the self
ized oil at port (P1) is released. pressure reducing valve passes through fine
q If the pressure of port (P1) is lowered exces- control hole (f) and flows to chamber (A) from
sively, spool (1) is pushed down by metering port (P1) to push the control valve spool.
spring (2). q The oil returning from chamber (B) passes
q Fine control hole (f) is shut off from drain from port (P2) through fine control hole (f') and
chamber (D), and it is almost simultaneously flows to drain chamber (D).
interconnected to pump pressure chamber
(PP).
q Pump pressure is supplied until the pressure at
port (P1) recovers to the level equivalent to the
lever position.
q When the spool of the control valve returns,
the oil in drain chamber (D) flows in from fine
control hole (f') in the valve on the side that is
not working. The oil passes through port (P2)
and enters chamber (B) to replenish the cham-
ber with pressurized oil.

10-403 8 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
PPC valve SEN06269-00

Travel PPC valve 1

P : From self-pressure reducing valve


P1 : To control valve (L.H. travel REVERSE port)
P2 : To control valve (L.H. travel FORWARD port)
P3 : To control valve (R.H. travel REVERSE port)
P4 : To control valve (R.H. travel FORWARD port)
T : To hydraulic tank

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 10-403 9


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
SEN06269-00 PPC valve

1. Plate
2. Case
3. Piston
4. Seal
5. Spool
6. Damper

10-403 10 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
PPC valve SEN06269-00

Unit: mm

No. Check item Criteria Remedy


Standard dimension Repair limit
Free length Load at Load at
Installed
x Outside installed Free length installed
7 Centering spring diameter
length
length length If damaged or
deformed,
108 N 86.3 N replace spring.
48.6 x 15.5 32.5 —
{11.0 kg} {8.8 kg}
16.7 N 13.3 N
8 Metering spring 26.5 x 8.15 24.9
{1.7 kg}

{1.36 kg}

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 10-403 11


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
SEN06269-00 PPC valve

1. Pressure reducing valve function q The relationship of the position of spool (1) and
body (10) [fine control hole (f) is in the middle
Operation between drain chamber (D) and pump pres-
sure chamber (PP)] does not change until
1) When in neutral retainer (9) contacts spool (1).
q Ports (A) and (B) of the control valve and ports q Metering spring (2) contracts in proportion to
(P1) and (P2) of the PPC valve are connected the stroke of the control lever.
to drain chamber (D) through fine control hole q Pressure at port (P1) also rises in proportion to
(f) in spool (1). the stroke of the control lever.
q In this way, the control valve spool moves to a
position where the pressure of chamber (A)
(same as pressure at port (P1)) and the force
of the return spring of the control valve spool
are balanced.

2) During fine control


(Neutral o fine control)
q When piston (4) is pushed by lever (5), retainer
(9) is pushed, spool (1) is also pushed by
metering spring (2), and moves down.
q When fine control hole (f) is shut off from drain
chamber (D), it is almost simultaneously inter-
connected to pump pressure chamber (PP).
q Pilot pressurized oil of the control pump is led
to port (A) from port (P1) through fine control
hole (f).
q When the pressure at port (P1) becomes
higher, spool (1) is pushed back and fine con-
trol hole (f) is shut off from pump pressure
chamber (PP). At almost the same time, it is
connected to drain chamber (D) to release the
pressure at port (P1).
q As a result, spool (1) moves up and down until
the force of metering spool (2) is balanced with
the pressure at port (P1).

10-403 12 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
PPC valve SEN06269-00

3) During fine control 4) At full stroke


(When control lever is returned) q Lever (5) pushes down piston (4), and retainer
q When lever (5) starts to be returned, spool (1) (9) pushes down spool (1).
is pushed up by the force of centering spring q Fine control hole (f) is shut off from drain
(3) and pressure at port (P1). chamber (D), and is interconnected to pump
q Because of this, fine control hole (f) is con- pressure chamber (PP).
nected to drain chamber (D), and the pressur- q Therefore, the pilot pressure oil from the self
ized oil at port (P1) is released. pressure reducing valve passes through fine
q If the pressure of port (P1) is lowered exces- control hole (f) and flows to chamber (A) from
sively, spool (1) is pushed down by metering port (P1) to push the control valve spool.
spring (2). q The oil returning from chamber (B) passes
q Fine control hole (f) is shut off from drain cham- from port (P2) through fine control hole (f') and
ber (D), and it is almost simultaneously inter- flows to drain chamber (D).
connected to pump pressure chamber (PP).
q Pump pressure is supplied until the pressure at
port (P1) recovers to the level equivalent to the
lever position.
q When the spool of the control valve returns,
the oil in drain chamber (D) flows in from fine
control hole (f') in the valve on the side that is
not working. The oil passes through port (P2)
and enters chamber (B) to replenish the cham-
ber with pressurized oil.

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 10-403 13


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
SEN06269-00 PPC valve

Service PPC valve (with EPC valve) 1

a For the details of operation, see the paragraph of “Work equipment swing PPC valve.”

10-403 14 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
PPC valve SEN06269-00

P: From self pressure reducing valve


P1: To service valve
P2: To service valve
T: To hydraulic tank

1. Spool
2. Piston
3. Lever
4. Plate
5. Retainer
6. Body
7. EPC valve

Unit: mm

No. Check item Criteria Remedy


Standard dimension Repair limit
Load at Load at
Free length x Installed
installed Free length installed
8 Centering spring Outside diameter length
length length If damaged or
deformed, replace
125 N 100 N spring.
33.9 x 15.3 28.4 —
{12.7 kg} {10.2 kg}
16.7 N 13.3 N
9 Metering spring 22.7 x 8.10 22.0
{1.70 kg}

{1.36 kg}

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 10-403 15


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
SEN06269-00 PPC valve

1. EPC valve

C: To control valve 2. Spool


P: From self pressure reducing valve 3. Push pin
T: To hydraulic tank 4. Coil
5. Plunger
1. Body 6. Connector

Unit: mm

No. Check item Criteria Remedy


Standard dimension Repair limit
Load at Load at If damaged or
Installed
Free length installed Free length installed deformed, replace
7 Return spring length
length length PPC valve assem-
bly.
3.1 N 2.5 N
9.5 8.4 —
{0.32 kg} {0.26 kg}

10-403 16 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
PPC valve SEN06269-00

Function
q The EPC valve consists of the proportional solenoid portion and the hydraulic valve portion.
q When it receives signal current (i) from the pump controller, it generates the EPC output pressure in pro-
portion to the size of the signal, and outputs it to the control valve.

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 10-403 17


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
SEN06269-00 PPC valve

Operation

1) When signal current is 0 (coil is de-energized)


q When there is no signal current flowing from the controller to coil (4), coil (4) is de-energized.
q Spool (2) is pushed to the left by spring (3).
q Port (C) closes and the pressurized oil from the front pump does not flow to the control valve.
q The pressurized oil from the control valve is drained to the tank through port (C) and port (T).

10-403 18 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
PPC valve SEN06269-00

2) When signal current is very small (coil is energized)


q When a very small signal current flows to coil (4), coil (4) is energized, and a propulsion force is gener-
ated on the right side of plunger (5).
q Push pin (6) pushes spool (2) to the right, and pressurized oil flows from port (P) to port (C).
q Pressures on port (C) increases and the force to act on surface (a) of spool (2) and the spring load on
spring (3) become larger than the propulsion force of plunger (5).
q Spool (2) is pushed to the left, port (P) is shut off from port (C) and ports (C) and (T) are connected.
q Spool (2) moves so that the propulsion force of plunger (5) may be balance with pressure of port (C) +
spring load of spring (3).
q The circuit pressure between the EPC valve and the control valve is controlled in proportion to the size
of the signal current.

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 10-403 19


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
SEN06269-00 PPC valve

3) When signal current is maximum (coil is energized)


q As the signal current flows to coil (4), coil (4) is energized.
q When this happens, the signal current is at its maximum, so the propulsion force of plunger (5) is also at
its maximum.
q Spool (2) is pushed to the left by push pin (6).
q The maximum volume of pressurized oil is conducted from port (P) to port (C), increasing the circuit
pressure across EPC valve and the control valve to the maximum level.
q Since port (T) is closed, pressurized oil does not flow to the hydraulic tank.

10-403 20 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
PPC valve SEN06269-00

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 10-403 21


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
SEN06269-00 PPC valve

Service PPC valve 1

a For the details of operation, see the paragraph of “Work equipment and swing PPC valve“.

10-403 22 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
PPC valve SEN06269-00

P: From self pressure reducing valve


P1: To service valve
P2: To service valve
T: To hydraulic tank

1. Spool
2. Piston
3. Lever
4. Plate
5. Retainer
6. Body

Unit: mm

No. Check item Criteria Remedy


Standard dimension Repair limit
Load at Load at
Free length x Installed
installed Free length installed
7 Centering spring Outside diameter length
length length If damaged or
deformed, replace
125 N 100 N spring.
33.9 x 15.3 28.4 —
{12.7 kg} {10.2 kg}
16.7 N 13.3 N
8 Metering spring 22.7 x 8.10 22.0
{1.70 kg}

{1.36 kg}

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 10-403 23


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
SEN06269-00 Solenoid valve

Solenoid valve 1

PPC lock, travel junction, merge-divider, travel speed, swing brake, machine push-up and 2-stage
relief solenoid valves

1. PPC lock solenoid valve T: To tank


2. Travel junction solenoid valve A1: To PPC valve
3. Merge-divider solenoid valve A2: To main valve (Travel junction valve)
4. Travel speed solenoid valve A3: To main valve (Merge-divider valve)
5. Swing brake solenoid valve A4: To both travel motors
6. Machine push-up solenoid valve A5: To swing motor
7. 2-stage relief solenoid valve A6: To main valve (2-stage safety valve at boom
cylinder head)
A8: To main valve (2-stage relief valve)
P1: From main pump
ACC: To accumulator

10-403 24 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
Solenoid valve SEN06269-00

1. Connector 4. Spool
2. Moving core 5. Block
3. Coil 6. Spring

Operation
When solenoid is deenergized When solenoid is energized
q Since the signal current does not flow from the q The signal current flows from the controller to
controller, solenoid (3) is deenergized. For this solenoid (3), and the latter is energized.
reason, spool (4) is pushed to the left by spring Accordingly, spool (4) is pressed against to the
(6). By this operation, the pass from port (P) to right side. By this operation, the pressurized oil
port (A) is closed and the pressurized oil from from the main pump flows through port (P) and
the main pump does not flow into the actuator. spool (4) to port (A), then flows into the actua-
At this time, the oil from the actuator is drained tor. At the same time, port (T) closes and stops
through ports (A) and (T) into the tank. the oil from flowing to the tank.

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 10-403 25


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
SEN06269-00 PPC accumulator

PPC accumulator 1

1. Gas plug
2. Shell
3. Poppet
4. Holder
5. Bladder
6. Oil port

Specifications
Gas capacity: 300 cc (for PPC)

10-403 26 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
Return oil filter SEN06269-00

Return oil filter 1

For breaker

1. Drain plug Specifications


2. Filter
Rated pressure: 6.9 MPa {70 kg/cm2}
3. Case
Flow: 200 l/min
4. Head cover
Relief valve cracking pressure:
5. Relief valve
0.34 ± 0.05 MPa {3.5 ± 0.5 kg/cm2}
Filter mesh size: 6 µm
Filtering area: 4,570 cm2

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 10-403 27


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
SEN06269-00 Center swivel joint

Center swivel joint 1

1. Cover A1: From control valve port A2


2. Body A2: To L.H. travel motor REVERSE port PB
3. Slipper seal B1: From control valve port B2
4. O-ring B2: To L.H. travel motor FORWARD port PA
5. Shaft C1: From control valve port A5
C2: To R.H. travel motor REVERSE port PA
D1: From control valve port B5
D2: To R.H. travel motor FORWARD port PB
E: To L.H. and R.H. travel motors port P
T1: From L.H. and R.H. travel motors port T
T2: To tank

Unit: mm
No. Check item Criteria Remedy
Clearance between rotor and Standard size Standard clearance Clearance limit
6 shaft Replace
80 0.056 to 0.105 0.111

10-403 28 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
Travel motor SEN06269-00

Travel motor 1
Type: HMV160ADT-2

MA: MA pressure detection port Specifications


MB: MB pressure detection port Type :HMV160ADT-2
P: From travel speed solenoid valve Theoretical displacement
PA: From control valve (Min.) :106.7 cm3/rev
PB: From control valve (Max.) :165.9 cm3/rev
T: To tank Rated pressure : 37.3 MPa {380 kg/cm2}
Rated speed
(Capacity min.) :2,460 rpm
(Capacity max.) :1,580 rpm
Brake release pressure :1.18 MPa {12 kg/cm2}
Travel speed selector pressure
(differential pressure) :0.78 MPa {8 kg/cm2}

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 10-403 29


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
SEN06269-00 Travel motor

10-403 30 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
Travel motor SEN06269-00

1. Output shaft
2. Motor case
3. Rocker cam
4. Piston
5. Cylinder block
6. Valve plate
7. End cover
8. Slow return valve
9. Brake spring
10. Brake piston
11. Plate
12. Disc
13. Regulator piston
14. Check valve
15. Counterbalance valve spool
16. Safety valve
17. Ball
18. Regulator valve
19. High pressure shuttle valve

Unit: mm
No. Check item Criteria Remedy
Standard size Repair limit
Free length x Installation Installed Installed
Free length
20 Spool return spring Outside diameter length load load
416.5 N 337 N
58.43 x 30.0 42.2 —
{43 kg} {34.4 kg} If damaged or
1.27 N 0.98 N deformed, replace
21 Check valve spring 33.0 x 13.8 23.0
{0.13 kg}

{0.10 kg} spring.
Regulator piston 323 N 258 N
22 spring 75.6 x 23.6 58.7
{32.9 kg}

{26.3 kg}
Regulator valve 98.1 N 78.5 N
23 spring 29.6 x 9.0 26.0
{10.0 kg}

{8.0 kg}

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 10-403 31


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
SEN06269-00 Travel motor

Operation of motor
1) At slow speed (motor swash plate angle at maximum)

q As the solenoid valve is deenergized, the pilot q The combined force of the piston propulsion
pressurized oil from the self pressure reducing forces works as the moment of inclining rocker
valve does not flow to port (P). cam (3) toward the maximum swash plate
q Regulator valve (18) is pushed to the right by angle.
spring (23). q The pressurized oil at regulator piston (13)
q Pressurized oil being conducted from the con- passes through orifice (c) of regulator valve
trol valve to end cover (7) by pressing high- (18) and is drained to the motor case.
pressure shuttle valve (20) is shut off by regu- q Rocker cam (3) is inclined in the maximum
lator valve (18). swash plate angle direction. The motor capac-
q Fulcrum (a) of rocker cam (3) is eccentric to ity becomes maximum, turning on the low
the working point (b) of the combined force of speed travel.
the propulsion force of cylinder (5).

10-403 32 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
Travel motor SEN06269-00

2) At high peed (motor swash plate angle at minimum)

q As the solenoid valve is energized, the pilot


pressurized oil from the self pressure reducing
valve flows to port (P).
q Regulator valve (18) is pushed to the left.
q The pressurized oil from the control valve
passes through passage (d) in regulator valve
(18) and enters regulator piston (13).
q Regulator piston (13) is pushed to the right.
q Rocker cam (3) is inclined in the minimum
swash plate angle direction. The motor capac-
ity becomes minimum, turning on the high
speed travel.

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 10-403 33


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
SEN06269-00 Travel motor

Operation of parking brake


1) When starting travel

q As the travel lever is operated, pressurized oil


from the pump activates counterbalance valve
spool (15), opening the parking brake circuit.
q The pressurized oil is conducted to chamber
(a) of brake piston (10) and compresses brake
spring (9), pushing brake piston (10) toward
right.
q Since the pushing force to plate (11) and disc
(12) disappears, plate (11) is separated from
disc (12) and the brake is released.

10-403 34 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
Travel motor SEN06269-00

2) When travel is stopped

q As the travel lever is placed in neutral, counter-


balance valve spool (15) returns to the neutral
position and closing the parking brake circuit.
q The pressurized oil in chamber (a) of brake
piston (10) passes through orifice (f) of brake
piston (10) and is drained to the motor case.
q Brake piston (10) is pushed to the left by brake
spring (9).
q Plate (11) and disc (12) are pushed together,
and the brake is applied.
q As brake piston (10) returns, flow of pressur-
ized oil is reduced with slow return valve (8).
q The time delay will be set to activate the brake
only after the machine has stopped.

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 10-403 35


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
SEN06269-00 Travel motor

Brake valve Operation when pressurized oil is supplied


q The brake valve consists of check valves (14), q Operating the travel lever conducts the pres-
counterbalance valve spool (15) and safety surized oil from the control valve to port (PA).
valve (16). q The pressurized oil push-opens check valve
q Functions and operations of respective compo- (14A) and then flows to motor outlet port (MB)
nents shall conform to the following. via motor inlet port (MA).
q The motor outlet side is closed by check valve
1. Counterbalance valve and check valve (14B) and counterbalance valve spool (15), so
the pressure at the supply side rises.
Function
q When traveling downhill, the machine travel
speed tends to get faster than the motor
(engine) speed because of the downward force
generated from its own weight.
q If the machine travels with the engine at low
speed, the motor may rotate without load,
causing the machine to run away, resulting in a
very dangerous situation.
q These valves are used to prevent above by
controlling the machine to travel according to
the engine speed (pump delivery).

10-403 36 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
Travel motor SEN06269-00

Operation of brake during travelling downhill


q The pressurized oil on the supply side flows to q If indication of the machine runaway is sensed
chamber (S1) via orifice (E1) and orifice (E2) of while travelling downhill, the motor will be
the counterbalance valve spool (15). caused to rotate without load to decrease the
q As the pressure in chamber (S1) goes above inlet side oil pressure.
the counterbalance valve spool selector pres- q Pressure in chamber (S1) is released via ori-
sure, counterbalance valve spool (15) is fices (E1) and (E2).
pushed toward right. q As the pressure in chamber (S1) goes below
q Port (MB) and port (PB) are connected, open- the spool selector pressure, counterbalance
ing the motor outlet port side and starting the valve spool (15) is returned to the left by spring
motor rotating. (21) and outlet port (MB) is throttled.
q The pressure at the outlet port side rises, gen-
erating rotation resistance on the motor to pre-
vent the machine from running away.
q The spool moves to a position where the pres-
sure on outlet port (MB) can be balanced
against the machine's own weight and the inlet
port pressure.
q Oil flow from the outlet circuit is reduced to
ensure the travel speed corresponded to the
pump delivery.

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 10-403 37


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
SEN06269-00 Travel motor

2. Safety valve
(bidirectional 2-stage set safety valve)

Function q As the pressure goes above the set pressure,


q As long as the machine travel is stopped (or it [Difference in areas of circles (D1) and (D2) x
is travelling downhill), the counterbalance Pressure] compresses spring (2).
valve closes the inlet and outlet circuits of the q Poppet (1) is moved leftward and the pressur-
motor. ized oil flows into chamber (MA) of the oppo-
q Since the motor is rotated by inertial force, site circuit.
pressure in the motor outlet port side is abnor-
mally increased, potentially resulting in dam-
ages on the motor and piping.
q The safety valve releases this abnormal pres-
sure to the inlet port side of the motor in order
to prevent damages to the equipment.

Bidirectional action
1) When pressure in chamber (MB) has
become high (when rotating clockwise)
q As long as the machine travel is stopped (or it
is travelling downhill), the check valve of coun-
terbalance valve closes chamber (MB) of the
outlet port circuit.
q The motor tries to continue rotation resorting to
inertial force, thus pressure on the outlet port
(MB) is increased.

10-403 38 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
Travel motor SEN06269-00

2) When pressure in chamber (MA) has Operation of mechanism for varying set pres-
become high (when rotating counterclock- sure
wise) 1) When starting travel (high-pressure setting)
q As long as the machine travel is stopped (or it q As the travel lever is operated, the pressurized
is travelling downhill), the check valve of coun- oil from the pump moves counterbalance valve
terbalance valve closes chamber (MA) of the spool (15) toward right.
outlet port circuit. q Above opens the pilot circuit to the safety
q The motor tries to continue rotation resorting to valve, conducting the pressurized oil to cham-
inertial force, thus pressure on the outlet port ber (J) via chamber (G) and passage (H).
(MA) is increased. q Piston (3) is pushed rightward, spring (2) is
compressed and the set load is increased.
q High pressure is turned on the safety valve,
providing a large tractional force to the valve.

q As the pressure goes above the set pressure,


[Difference in areas of circles (D1) and (D3) x
Pressure] compresses spring (2).
q Poppet (1) is moved leftward and the pressur-
ized oil flows into chamber (MB) of the oppo-
site circuit.

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 10-403 39


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
SEN06269-00 Travel motor

2) When travel is stopped (low-pressure set-


ting)
q When the travel lever is placed in neutral, the
pressure in chamber (PA) drops and counter-
balance valve spool (15) returns to the neutral
position.
q When counterbalance valve spool (15) is in the
process of returning to the neutral position, the
pressurized oil in chamber (J) flows to cham-
ber (PA) via passage (H) and chamber (G).
q Piston (3) moves to the left side, decreasing
the set load.
q The safety valve is caused to the low pressure
setting, thereby attenuating the shocks when
the speed is reduced.

Set pressure of safety valve


High pressure setting:
40.2 MPa {410 kg/cm2}
(at start of travel and during travel)
Low pressure setting:
27.5 MPa {280 kg/cm2} (during stop)

10-403 40 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
Swing motor SEN06269-00

Swing motor 1
Type: KMF160

B: From swing holding brake solenoid Specifications


MA: From control valve Type : KMF160
MB: From control valve Theoretical displacement : 167.5 cm3/rev
S: From control valve Safety valve set pressure : 27.9 MPa {285 kg/cm2}
T: To tank Rated engine speed : 1,570 rpm
Brake release pressure : 1.4 MPa {14 kg/cm2}
1. Reverse prevention valve
2. Safety valve

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 10-403 41


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
SEN06269-00 Swing motor

10-403 42 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
Swing motor SEN06269-00

1. Brake spring
2. Drive shaft
3. Spacer
4. Case
5. Disc
6. Plate
7. Brake piston
8. Housing
9. Piston
10. Cylinder block
11. Valve plate
12. Center shaft
13. Center spring
14. Check valve
15. Check valve spring
16. Shuttle valve
17. Shuttle valve spring

Unit: mm
No. Check item Criteria Remedy
Standard size Repair limit
Free length x Installed Installed Installed
Free length
18 Check valve spring Outside diameter length load load If damaged or
4.9 N 3.92 N deformed, replace
52.7 x 22.4 36.9 — spring.
{0.5 kg} {0.4 kg}
7.7 N 6.16 N
19 Shuttle valve spring 24.5 x 11.6 14.0
{0.79 kg}

{0.63 kg}

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 10-403 43


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
SEN06269-00 Swing motor

Swing holding brake


1. When solenoid valve is deenergized 2. When solenoid valve is energized

Operation Operation
q As the swing holding brake is deenergized, the q As the swing brake solenoid valve is ener-
pressurized oil from the self pressure reducing gized, the valve is switched.
valve is shut off. q The pressurized oil from the self pressure
q Port (B) is connected to tank circuit (T). reducing valve is conducted brake chamber (a)
q Brake piston (7) is pushed down by brake via port (B).
spring (1). q After entering chamber (a), the pressurized oil
q Disc (5) and plate (6) are pushed together, and compresses brake spring (1) and pushes
the brake is applied. brake piston (7) up.
q Disc (5) is separated from plate (6), releasing
the brake.

10-403 44 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
Swing motor SEN06269-00

Relief valve portion 2. When swing is stopped


q When the swing control lever is returned to
Outline neutral, the supply of pressurized oil from the
q The relief valve portion consists of check pump to port (MA) is stopped.
valves (2) and (3), shuttle valves (4) and (5), q The pressurized oil from the motor outlet can't
and relief valve (1). return to the tank since the returning circuit to
the tank is closed from control valve (6). Thus,
Function pressure on port (MB) increases.
q Rotation resistance is generated on the motor
q When the machine is in the swing holding
and hence the brake starts working.
mode, control valve (6) closes the motor outlet
q Shuttle valve (4) is pressed as pressure on
circuit, but the motor rotation is continued by
port (MB) goes above port (MA).
inertial force.
q The pressure on chamber (C) is increased to
q The motor output, therefore, is abnormally
the set pres sure of relief valve (1) and
increased, resulting in damaging the motor.
becomes the same as that of port (MB).
q In order to prevent the motor damages, the
q A high braking torque works on the motor,
relief valve relieves the abnormally high pres-
thereby stopping the motor.
sure to port (S) from the motor outlet side
q When relief valve (1) is being actuated, the
(high-pressure side) of the motor.
relieved pressurized oil and the pressurized oil
from port (S) are fed to port (MA) via check
Operation
valve (3).
1. When starting swing q Above prevents cavitation on port (MA).
q When the swing control lever is operated to the
right- swing, the pressurized oil from the pump
is supplied to port (MA) via control valve (6).
q The pressure on port (MA) rises, the starting
torque is generated in the motor, and the motor
starts to rotate.
q The pressurized oil from the outlet port of the
motor passes from port (MB) through the con-
trol valve (6) and returns to the tank.

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 10-403 45


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
SEN06269-00 Swing motor

Reverse prevention valve

10-403 46 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
Swing motor SEN06269-00

MA: From control valve


MB: From control valve
T1: To tank
T2: To tank

1. Valve body
2. Spool (MA side)
3. Spring (MA side)
4. Plug (MA side)
5. Spool (MB side)
6. Spring (MB side)
7. Plug (MB side)

Explanatory drawing of effects

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 10-403 47


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
SEN06269-00 Swing motor

Function 2. When motor is stopped temporarily


q This valve reduces the swing back generation q The motor rotation is reversed by the closing
in the swing body by the inertia of the swing pressure generated at port (MB). (1st time:
body, the backlash and rigidity of the machin- reverse rotation)
ery system, and the compression of the q Reversing pressure is generated on port (MA).
hydraulic oil when the swing is stopped. Pressure (MA) is conducted to chamber (a).
q The valve contributes in preventing collapsing q The pressure compresses spring (3) by use of
of load when the swing is stopped and also the difference in areas of circles (φD3 > φD4) of
contributes in reducing cycle time (enhances spool (2) and moves spool (2) to the right side.
the positioning performance, enabling you to q Port (MA) o chamber (b) will be intercon-
proceed to the next work quicker than ever). nected.
q Then ports (b) and (f) will be interconnected
Operation through the drilled hole (h) on spool (5). This
1. When port (MB) brake pressure is gener- interconnection bypasses the reversing pres-
ated sure on port (MA) to port (T), thereby prevent-
q Pressure (MB) is conducted to chamber (d) via ing the reverse rotation of the 2nd time.
notch (g).
q The pressure compresses spring (6) by use of
the difference in areas of circles (φD1 > φD2) of
spool (5) and moves spool (5) to the left side.
q Port (MB)o chamber (e) will be intercon-
nected.
q Since pressure (MA) is lower than the set pres-
sure of spring (3), spool (2) does not move and
the pressurized oil is kept in. Thus the braking
force is ensured.

10-403 48 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
Swing motor SEN06269-00

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 10-403 49


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
SEN06269-00 Work equipment cylinder

Work equipment cylinder 1

Boom cylinder

Unit: mm
No. Item Criteria Remedy
Standard Tolerance Standard
Allowable limit
Clearance between pis- dimension Shaft Hole clearance
1 ton rod and bushing Replace bushing
-0.036 +0.257
100 0.083 to 0.347 0.447
-0.090 +0.047
Clearance between pis-
-0.036 +0.457
2 ton rod support shaft and 100
-0.071 +0.370
0.406 to 0.528 1.0
bushing Replace pin and
Clearance between cylin- bushing
-0.036 +0.161
3 der bottom support shaft 90
-0.090 +0.074
0.110 to 0.251 1.0
and bushing
Tightening torque of cyl-
4 inder head bolt 373 ± 54 Nm {38.0 ± 5.5 kgm}

Tightening torque of cyl-


5 inder piston 294 ± 29.4 Nm {30.0 ± 3.0 kgm} Retighten

Tightening torque of cyl-


6 inder piston lock screw 58.9 to 73.6 Nm {6.0 to 7.5 kgm}

10-403 50 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
Work equipment cylinder SEN06269-00

Arm cylinder

Unit: mm
No. Item Criteria Remedy
Standard Tolerance Standard
Allowable limit
Clearance between pis- dimension Shaft Hole clearance
1 ton rod and bushing Replace bushing
-0.036 +0.261
110 0.083 to 0.351 0.451
-0.090 +0.047
Clearance between pis-
-0.036 +0.457
2 ton rod support shaft and 100
-0.090 +0.370
0.406 to 0.547 1.0
bushing Replace pin and
Clearance between cylin- bushing
-0.036 +0.457
3 der bottom support shaft 100
-0.090 +0.370
0.406 to 0.547 1.0
and bushing
Tightening torque of cyl-
4 inder head bolt 530 ± 78.5 Nm {54.0 ± 8.0 kgm}

Tightening torque of cyl-


5 inder piston 294 ± 29.4 Nm {30.0 ± 3.0 kgm} Retighten

Tightening torque of cyl-


6 inder piston lock screw 58.9 to 73.6 Nm {6.0 to 7.5 kgm}

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 10-403 51


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
SEN06269-00 Work equipment cylinder

Bucket cylinder

Unit: mm
No. Item Criteria Remedy
Standard Tolerance Standard
Allowable limit
Clearance between pis- dimension Shaft Hole clearance
1 ton rod and bushing Replace bushing
-0.036 +0.257
100 0.083 to 0.347 0.447
-0.090 +0.047
Clearance between pis-
-0.036 +0.457
2 ton rod support shaft and 90
-0.090 +0.370
0.406 to 0.547 1.0
bushing Replace pin and
Clearance between cylin- bushing
-0.036 +0.457
3 der bottom support shaft 90
-0.090 +0.370
0.406 to 0.547 1.0
and bushing
Tightening torque of cyl-
4 inder head bolt 373 ± 54 Nm {38.0 ± 5.5 kgm}

Tightening torque of cyl-


5 inder piston 294 ± 29.4 Nm {30.0 ± 3.0 kgm} Retighten

Tightening torque of cyl-


6 inder piston lock screw 58.9 to 73.6 Nm {6.0 to 7.5 kgm}

10-403 52 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
Work equipment cylinder SEN06269-00

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 10-403 53


SEN06269-00

PC300-8M0, PC300LC-8M0, PC350-8M0, PC350LC-8M0 HYDRAULIC EXCAVATOR

Form No. SEN06269-00

© 2013 KOMATSU
All Rights Reserved
Printed in Japan 01-13 (01)

10-403 54
SEN06270-00

HYDRAULIC EXCAVATOR 1SHOP MANUAL

PC300-8M0
PC300LC-8M0
PC350-8M0
PC350LC-8M0

Machine model Serial number


PC300-8M0 80001 and up
PC300LC-8M0 80001 and up
PC350-8M0 80001 and up
PC350LC-8M0 80001 and up

10 Structure, function and


maintenance standard 1
500 Work equipment
Work equipment............................................................................................................................................. 2
Dimensions of components............................................................................................................................ 4

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 10-500 1


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
SEN06270-00 Work equipment

Work equipment 1

10-500 2 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
Work equipment SEN06270-00

Unit: mm
No. Check item Criteria Remedy
Standard Tolerance Standard Clearance
Clearance between pin connecting size clearance limit
Shaft Hole
1 boom and revolving frame and
bushing –0.036 +0.157 0.115 to
110 1.0
–0.090 +0.079 0.247
Clearance between pin connecting –0.036 +0.179 0.117 to
2 boom and arm and bushing 110
–0.090 +0.081 0.269
1.0

Clearance between pin connecting –0.036 +0.165 0.108 to Replace


3 arm and link and bushing 90
–0.090 +0.072 0.255
1.0

Clearance between pin connecting –0.036 +0.145 0.119 to


4 arm and bucket and bushing 90
–0.090 +0.083 0.235
1.0

Clearance between pin connecting –0.036 +0.165 0.108 to


5 link and bucket and bushing 90
–0.090 +0.072 0.255
1.0

Clearance between pin connecting –0.036 +0.163 0.105 to


6 links and bushing 90
–0.090 +0.069 0.253
1.0

7 Bucket clearance 0.5 to 1.0 Adjust shims

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 10-500 3


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
SEN06270-00 Dimensions of components

Dimensions of components 1
1. Dimension of arm

10-500 4 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
Dimensions of components SEN06270-00

Unit: mm
PC300-8 PC350-8
No. Measuring position Standard Tolerance Standard Tolerance
size Shaft Hole size Shaft Hole
–0.036 +0.1 –0.036 +0.1
1 – φ100 φ100
–0.071 0 –0.071 0
+1.5 +1.5
Arm side 119.3 119.3
2 0 0
Cylinder head side 116 ±1.2 116 ±1.2
+0.5 +0.5
Boom side 320 320
0 0
3
–0.3 –0.3
Arm side 316 316
–0.8 –0.8
–0.036 +0.1 –0.036 +0.1
4 – φ110 φ110
–0.090 +0.1 –0.090 +0.1
5 – 470.6 ±1 470.6 ±1
6 – 236.5 ±0.5 236.5 ±0.5
7 – 1022.4 ±1 1022.4 ±1
8 – 3178 ±3 3178 ±3
9 – 2975.6 ±1 2975.6 ±1
10 – 472.5 – 472.5 ±1.0
11 – 731.0 ±0.2 731.0 ±0.2
12 – 728.0 ±0.5 728.0 ±0.5
13 – 513.6 – 513.6 –
14 – 1670 – 1670 –
–0.036 +0.2 –0.036 +0.2
15 – φ90 φ90
–0.090 0 –0.090 0
16 – 345.0 ±0.5 345.0 ±0.5
–0.036 +0.054 –0.036 +0.054
17 – φ90 φ90
–0.090 +0.054 –0.090 +0.054
0 0
Arm itself 330 330
18 –0.5 –0.5
When press fitting bushing 345 – 345 –
Min. 1870 – 1870 –
19
Max. 3155 – 3155 –

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 10-500 5


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
SEN06270-00 Dimensions of components

2. Dimension of bucket

10-500 6 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
Dimensions of components SEN06270-00

Unit: mm
PC300-8 PC350-8
No. Measuring position Standard Standard
Tolerance Tolerance
size size
1 – 512.2 ±0.5 512.2 ±0.5
2 – 37.9 ±0.5 37.9 ±0.5
3 – 94°19' – 94°14' –
4 – 513.6 – 513.6 –
5 – 1658 – 1666 –
6 – 193 – 208 –
7 – 50° – 42° –
+0.2 +0.2
8 – φ90 φ90
+0.0 +0.0
+0.054 +0.054
9 – φ120 φ120
+0.054 +0.054
+0.1 +0.1
10 – φ125 φ125
+0.1 +0.1
+1 +1
11 – 346
0
346
0
12 – 68 – 68 –
13 – 138 – 138 –
+0.5 +0.5
14 – 525.5
–0.25
525.5
–0.25
15 – φ26 – φ26 –
16 – φ165 – φ165 –
17 – φ150 – φ150 –
18 – φ200 – φ200 –
19 – 145.8 – 137.9 –
20 – 138.2 – 140.4 –
21 – R115 – R115 –
22 – R100 – R100 –
+2 +2
23 – 382
0
382
0
24 – 60 – 60 –
25 – 56 – 56 –

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 10-500 7


SEN06270-00

PC300-8M0, PC300LC-8M0, PC350-8M0, PC350LC-8M0 HYDRAULIC EXCAVATOR

Form No. SEN06270-00

© 2013 KOMATSU
All Rights Reserved
Printed in Japan 01-13 (01)

10-500 8
SEN06271-00

HYDRAULIC EXCAVATOR 1SHOP MANUAL

PC300-8M0
PC300LC-8M0
PC350-8M0
PC350LC-8M0

Machine model Serial number


PC300-8M0 80001 and up
PC300LC-8M0 80001 and up
PC350-8M0 80001 and up
PC350LC-8M0 80001 and up

10 Structure, function and


maintenance standard 1
600 Electrical system
Engine control system .................................................................................................................................... 2
Electronic control system ..............................................................................................................................11
Machine monitor system .............................................................................................................................. 36
Sensor .......................................................................................................................................................... 56
KOMTRAX system ....................................................................................................................................... 59

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 10-600 1


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
SEN06271-00 Engine control system

Engine control system 1

1. Battery relay Outline


2. Battery q The engine can be started and stopped with
3. Starting switch only starting switch (3).
4. Fuel control dial
5. Starting motor
6. Engine throttle controller
7. Pump controller

10-600 2 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
Engine control system SEN06271-00

Operation of system
Starting engine Stopping engine
q When the starting switch is turned to START q When detecting that the starting switch is set to
position, the starting signal flows to the starting “STOP” position, the engine controller cuts the
motor. Then, the starting motor turns to start fuel injection to stop the engine.
the engine.

When it happens, the engine controller checks


the signal voltage from the fuel control dial and
sets the engine speed to the speed set by the
fuel control dial.

Engine speed control


q The fuel control dial sends a signal voltage cor-
responding to the rotation angle to the engine
controller.
q The pump controller receives the fuel dial posi-
tion information from the engine controller
through the network.
q The pump controller calculates the engine
speed in accordance with the working mode,
the decelerate, and the like, and sends an
instruction to the engine controller.
q The engine controller determines the fuel injec-
tion quantity based on the instruction received
from the pump controller.

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 10-600 3


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
SEN06271-00 Engine control system

Component

Fuel control dial

1. Knob 4. Ball
2. Dial 5. Potentiometer
3. Spring 6. Connector

Function
q A potentiometer is installed under the knob. As
the knob is turned, the potentiometer shaft is
turned.
q As the potentiometer shaft is turned, the resis-
tance of the variable resistor in potentiometer
(5) changes and a throttle signal is sent to the
engine controller.
q The hatched area in the graph shown at right is
the abnormality detection area.
The engine speed is set to low idle in the
abnormality detection area.

10-600 4 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
Engine control system SEN06271-00

Engine controller

q Meanings of signal classes in the terminal CN-CE01


table shown below are as follows. Input/
A: Power Supply Pin No. Signal name
output
B: Input 11 Fuel feed pump return C
C: Ground/Shield/Return 12 NC(*) –
D: Output 13 NC(*) B
E: Communication 14 WATER-IN-FUEL sensor B
CN-CE01 15 Coolant temperature sensor B
Input/ 16 5V electric power supply for sensor A
Pin No. Signal name
output 17 Oil pressure switch B
1 Electric power supply for fuel feed pump D 18 NC(*) –
2 Electric power supply for IMA D 19 NC(*) –
3 Atmosphere sensor B 20 NC(*) –
4 NC(*) – 21 NC(*) –
5 NC(*) – 22 NC(*) D
6 CAN(–) E 23 Boost temperature sensor B
7 NC(*) – 24 NC(*) –
8 CAN(+) E 25 Common rail pressure sensor B
9 NC(*) – 26 Buckup sensor B
10 NC(*) – 27 Ne sensor (+) B
*: Never connect to NC or malfunctions or failures will *: Never connect to NC or malfunctions or failures will
occur. occur.

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 10-600 5


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
SEN06271-00 Engine control system

CN-CE01 CN-CE02
Input/ Input/
Pin No. Signal name Pin No. Signal name
output output
28 NC(*) – 13 NC(*) B
29 NC(*) – 14 NC(*) B
30 NC(*) – 15 NC(*) B
31 NC(*) D 16 NC(*) B
32 NC(*) C 17 NC(*) B
33 GND A 18 NC(*) B
34 NC(*) – 19 NC(*) B
35 NC(*) A 20 NC(*) E
36 NC(*) – 21 NC(*) A
37 NC(*) A 22 Fuel control dial (+5V) A
38 NC(*) C 23 Fuel control dial (–) C
39 Key switch (ACC) – 24 NC(*) B
40 Electrical intake air heater relay drive – 25 NC(*) B
41 NC(*) – 26 NC(*) B
42 Electrical intake air heater relay return C 27 NC(*) B
43 NC(*) – 28 NC(*) B
44 Boost pressure sensor B 29 NC(*) C
45 Injector #1 (+) D 30 NC(*) B
46 Injector #5 (+) D 31 NC(*) B
47 Sensor GND C 32 NC(*) C
48 Ne sensor (–) C 33 GND C
49 NC(*) – 34 NC(*) C
50 NC(*) – 35 NC(*) B
51 Injector #2 (–) C 36 NC(*) B
52 Injector #3 (–) C 37 NC(*) C
53 Injector #1 (–) C 38 NC(*) D
54 Injector #2 (+) D 39 Key switch (ACC) A
55 Injector #3 (+) D 40 Electrical intake air heater relay drive D
56 Injector #4 (+) D 41 NC(*) D
57 Injector #6 (+) D 42 Electrical intake air heater relay return C
58 Injector #4 (–) C 43 NC(*) D
59 Injector #6 (–) C 44 NC(*) D
60 Injector #5 (–) C 45 NC(*) –
*: Never connect to NC or malfunctions or failures will 46 CAN(+) E
occur. 47 CAN(–) E
48 NC(*) D
CN-CE02 49 PWM OUTPUT D
Input/ 50 NC(*) D
Pin No. Signal name
output *: Never connect to NC or malfunctions or failures will
1 NC(*) B occur.
2 NC(*) B
3 NC(*) B CN-CE03
4 NC(*) B Input/
Pin No. Signal name
5 NC(*) B output
6 NC(*) B 1 GND C
7 NC(*) B 2 NC(*) C
8 NC(*) B Electric power supply (+24V con-
3 A
9 Fuel control dial (+) B stantly)
10 NC(*) B 4 NC(*) A
11 NC(*) B *: Never connect to NC or malfunctions or failures will
12 NC(*) B occur.
*: Never connect to NC or malfunctions or failures will
occur.

10-600 6 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
Engine control system SEN06271-00

Coolant temperature sensor

1. Connector
2. Sensor
3. O-ring

Oil pressure switch

1. Connector
2. Sensor
3. O-ring

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 10-600 7


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
SEN06271-00 Engine control system

Rotation sensor

1. Connector
2. Sensor
3. O-ring

Boost pressure and temperature sensor

1. Connector
2. Sensor
3. O-ring

10-600 8 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
Engine control system SEN06271-00

WIF (water-in-fuel detection) sensor

1. Connector
2. Tube
3. Sensor
4. O-ring

Engine oil level sensor

1. Connector
2. Bracket
3. Float
4. Switch

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 10-600 9


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
SEN06271-00 Engine control system

10-600 10 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
Electronic control system SEN06271-00

Electronic control system 1

Control function
1

Engine and pump composite control function

Pump and valve control function

Power maximizing function

Machine push-up function

Auto-deceleration function

Auto-warm-up and overheat prevention function

Electronic control system


6

Swing control function

Travel control function

8
Attachment flow control and circuit selector function
(if equipped)

Self-diagnosis function

a For the self-diagnosis function, see “Troubleshooting“.

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 10-600 11


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
SEN06271-00 Electronic control system

Machine control system diagram

10-600 12 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
Electronic control system SEN06271-00

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 10-600 13


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
SEN06271-00 Electronic control system

1. Engine and pump composite control function

10-600 14 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
Electronic control system SEN06271-00

Function 1) Control method in each mode


q This function allows the operator to select P and E modes
proper engine torque and pump absorption q Matching point in P mode: Rated speed
torque according to the type of work. 4 modes
are provided: P, E, B and L. Using the work Mode Matching point
mode switch on the monitor panel, the opera- 186.8 kW/1,950 rpm
tor is required to select one of them. P
{250 HP/1,950 rpm}
q The pump controller detects the speed of the
147.1 kW/1,950 rpm
engine governor set with the fuel control dial E
{197 HP/1,950 rpm}
and the actual engine speed (N) and controls
them so that the pump will absorb all the
q If the pump load increases and the pres-
torque at each output point of the engine,
sure rises, engine speed (N) lowers. At
according to the pump absorption torque set in
this time, the controller lowers the pump
each mode.
discharge so that the engine speed will be
near the maximum output point.
If the pressure lowers, the controller
increases pump discharge (Q) so that the
engine speed will be near the maximum
output point.
By repeating these operations, the con-
troller constantly uses the engine near the
maximum output point.

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 10-600 15


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
SEN06271-00 Electronic control system

B and L modes

Mode B mode L mode


Partial output point 74% 60%

Mode Matching point


136.1 kW/1,780 rpm
B
{182 HP/1,780 rpm}
110.3 kW/1,470 rpm
L
{148 HP/1,470 rpm}

q In B or L mode, the controller controls the


pump absorption torque through the pump
and engine compound control function to
decrease engine speed (N) while main-
taining engine torque (T) constant along
the constant horsepower curve. This
ensures reduced fuel consumption.

10-600 16 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
Electronic control system SEN06271-00

2) Function to control pump during travel 3) Function to control when emergency pump
q Traveling the machine in E or B mode drive switch is turned on
leaves the working mode unchanged, but q Even if any abnormality occurs in the controller
raises the pump absorption torque and or sensor, setting emergency pump drive
engine speed (N) to values same as those switch (1) to “ON” position activates the
in P mode. machine with an absorption torque approxi-
q If the machine travels in L mode, the work- mately equivalent to that in E mode.
ing mode and engine speed (N) do not In this case, a constant current flows from the
change, but the pump absorption torque is battery to the EPC valve for PC and therefore,
increased. the oil pressure is sensed by only the EPC
valve for PC.

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 10-600 17


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
SEN06271-00 Electronic control system

2. Pump and valve control function

Function
q The machine is matched to various types of
work properly with the 2-stage relief function to
increase the digging force, etc.

10-600 18 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
Electronic control system SEN06271-00

1) LS control function 3) 2-stage relief function


q Depending on the operation condition of q The relief pressure in the normal work is
the actuator, this function changes the 34.8 MPa {355 kg/cm 2 }. If the 2-stage
pressure output from the LS-EPC valve to relief function is turned on, however, the
LS valve to change the change point (LS relief pressure rises to approximately 37.2
set differential pressure (DLS)) of the MPa {380 kg/cm2}. By this operation, the
pump discharge in the LS valve. hydraulic force is increased further.
q By this operation, the start-up time of the
pump discharge is optimized and the com- Operating condition for turning on
Relief pressure
posite operation and fine control perfor- 2-stage relief function
mance is improved. • During travel
• When swing lock switch is turned to 34.8 MPa
ON position {355 kg/cm2}
• When boom is lowered O
• When power maximizing function is 37.2 MPa
turned on {380 kg/cm2}
• When L mode is operated

2) Cut-off function
q This function increases PC-EPC current
(J) to reduce the flow rate in the relief
state, improving fuel consumption.

Operating condition for turning on cut-off function


When the average value of the front and rear pressure
sensors is above 27.9 MPa {285 kg/cm2} with the power
maximizing function off.
The cut-off function does not work, however, while the
machine is travelling in P mode, swing lock switch is in
“ON” position.

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 10-600 19


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
SEN06271-00 Electronic control system

3. Power maximizing and machine push-up function

Function
q The power maximizing function allows the
operator to increase power for a certain time
by operating the left knob switch.
q The machine push-up function allows the oper-
ator to increase the boom pushing force by
operating the machine push-up switch.

10-600 20 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
Electronic control system SEN06271-00

1) Power maximizing function 2) Machine push-up function


q This function is used to increase digging q The machine push-up function allows the
force for a certain period of time (e.g., operator to increase the boom pushing
when digging up a large rock). force that is required for ditching or mass
q If the left knob switch is pressed in P or E excavation in hard ground by operating
mode, the hydraulic force is increased machine push-up switch (1).
approximately 7% to increase the digging
force. Each function is set automatically 2-stage safety valve
Switch
as shown below. function
Setting of safety valve at
Function Setting boom cylinder head
OFF
Engine and pump Matching at rated 14.7 MPa
control horsepower point {150 kg/cm2}
34.8 MPa Setting of safety valve at
{355 kg/cm2} boom cylinder head
ON
2-stage relief function O 28.4 MPa
37.2 MPa {290 kg/cm2}
{380 kg/cm2}
Software cut-off function Cancel

q These settings are automatically reset


after 8.5 seconds when the switch is
pressed.

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 10-600 21


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
SEN06271-00 Electronic control system

4. Auto-deceleration function

Function
q The auto-deceleration function automatically
reduces the engine speed to its medium speed
range when the all control levers are set in
NEUTRAL while waiting for a dump truck or
work to reduce the fuel consumption and
noise.
q If any lever is operated, the engine speed
instantly returns to the speed set with the fuel
control dial.

Operation
When control levers are set in neutral
q If all the control levers are kept to NEUTRAL
for 4 sec. during operation at a engine speed
above a decelerator operation level (approxi-
mately 1,000 rpm), this function lowers the
engine speed to the deceleration operation
level (approximately 1,000 rpm) and keeps it
until you operate any lever.
When any control lever is operated
q If you operate any control lever while the
engine speed is kept at the deceleration opera-
tion level, the engine speed instantly rises to
the level set with the fuel control dial.

10-600 22 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
Electronic control system SEN06271-00

5. Auto-warm-up and overheat prevention function

Function
q The engine automatic warm-up function
increases the engine speed to warm up the
engine if coolant temperature is too low after
the engine starts.
q The overheat prevention function reduces the
pump load when coolant or hydraulic oil tem-
perature is too high during operation to protect
the engine from overheating.

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 10-600 23


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
SEN06271-00 Electronic control system

1) Auto-warm-up function
q After the engine is started, if the engine coolant temperature is low, the engine speed is raised auto-
matically to warm up the engine.

Operating condition (All) Operated


Coolant temperature: Below 30°C.
Engine speed: Max. 1,250 rpm ⇒ Engine speed: Max. 1,250 rpm


Resetting condition (Any one) Reset


Coolant temperature: Above 30°C
Auto
Auto-warm-up operation time: Min. 10 minutes
Engine speed: Any level
Fuel control dial: Kept at 70% of full level for 3
Manual
sec. or longer

2) Overheat prevention function


q If the engine coolant temperature rises too high during work, the pump load and engine speed are
reduced to protect the engine from overheating.
q This function operates when the coolant temperature is 100°C or hydraulic temperature is 95°C.

Operating condition Operation/Remedy Resetting condition


Hydraulic oil temperature: Below

⇒ ⇒
Work mode: Travel 95°C
Hydraulic oil tempera-
Engine speed: Keep as is. • Under above condition, controller
ture: Above 95°C
Lower travel speed. is set to condition before opera-
tion of function. (Automatic reset)

Operating condition Operation/Remedy Resetting condition


Hydraulic oil or coolant tempera-

⇒ ⇒
Hydraulic oil or cool- Work mode: P mode ture: Below 100°C
ant temperature: Engine speed: Keep as is. • Under above condition, controller
Above 100°C Lower pump discharge. is set to condition before opera-
tion of function. (Automatic reset)

Operating condition Operation/Remedy Resetting condition


Hydraulic oil or coolant tempera-
Work mode: P, E or L mode
⇒ ⇒
Hydraulic oil or cool- ture: Below 102°C
Engine speed: Keep as is.
ant temperature: • Under above condition, controller
Monitor alarm lamp: Lights up.
Above 102°C is set to condition before opera-
Lower pump discharge.
tion of function. (Automatic reset)

Operating condition Operation/Remedy Resetting condition


Hydraulic oil or coolant tempera-
ture: Below 105°C
Work mode: Any mode
⇒ ⇒
Hydraulic oil or cool- Fuel control dial: Return to low idle
Engine speed: Low idle
ant temperature: position once.
Monitor alarm lamp: Lights up
Above 105°C • Under above condition, controller
Alarm buzzer: Sounds
is set to condition before opera-
tion of function. (Manual reset)

10-600 24 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
Electronic control system SEN06271-00

6. Swing control function

Function
The swing lock and swing holding brake function
are provided as a swing control function.

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 10-600 25


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
SEN06271-00 Electronic control system

1) Swing lock and swing holding brake func- 2) Quick hydraulic oil warm-up function when
tion swing lock switch is turned on
q The swing lock function (manual) is used q If swing lock switch (1) is turned on, the
to lock machine from swinging at any posi- pump cut-off function is cancelled and the
tion. The swing holding brake function relief pressure rises from 34.8 MPa {355
(automatic) is used to prevent hydraulic kg/cm2} to 37.2 MPa {380 kg/cm2}. If the
drift after the machine stops swinging. work equipment is relieved under this con-
q Operation of swing lock switch and swing dition, the hydraulic oil temperature rises
lock/holding brake quickly and the warm-up time can be
shortened.
Lock Lock Func-
Operation
switch lamp tion
If swing lever is set in
neutral, swing brake
operates in approxi-
Swing
mately 7 sec.
OFF OFF holding
If swing lever is oper-
brake
ated, brake is released
and machine can swing
freely.
Swing lock operates and
machine is locked from
swinging.
Swing
ON ON Even if swing lever is
lock
operated, swing lock is
not reset and machine
does not swing.

Swing holding brake release switch


q If the controller, etc. has a problem, the
swing holding brake does not work nor-
mally, and the machine cannot swing, the
swing lock can be reset with the swing
holding brake release switch.
q Even if the swing holding brake release
switch is turned on, if the swing lock
switch is turned on, the swing brake is not
released.
q If the swing lock is reset, only the hydrau-
lic brake is applied by the safety valve.
Note that if swinging is stopped on a
slope, the upper structure may swing by
its gravity.

Swing
holding ON OFF
brake (when controller has (when controller is nor-
release trouble) maly)
switch
Swing lock
ON OFF ON OFF
switch
Swing
Swing lock Swing lock Swing lock
Swing holding
is turned is can- is turned
brake brake is
on. celed. on.
turned on.

10-600 26 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
Electronic control system SEN06271-00

7. Travel control function

Function
q The machine is provided with a function that
ensures travel performance best fit to the type
of work and jobsite by controlling pumps during
travel or allowing operator to change travel
speed automatically or manually.

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 10-600 27


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
SEN06271-00 Electronic control system

1) Pump control function during travel 2) Travel speed change function


q If the machine travels in a work mode 1] Manual change with travel speed switch
other than P mode, the work mode and If one of Lo, Mi and Hi is selected with the
the engine speed are kept as they are and travel speed switch, the pump controller
the pump absorption torque is increased. controls the pump capacity and motor
q For details, see "Engine and pump com- capacity at each gear speed as shown
posite control function." below to change the travel speed.

Lo Mi Hi
Travel speed switch (Low (Medium (High
speed) speed) speed)
Pump capacity (%) 90 82 100
Motor capacity Max. Min. Min.
Travel speed (km/h) 3.2 4.5 5.5

2] Automatic change by engine speed


If the fuel control dial is used to set the
engine speed to less than 1,200 rpm, the
travel speed changes to Lo when the
machine is travelling in Mi or Hi, and the
travel speed will not change to Mi or Hi.

3] Automatic change by pump discharge


pressure
When traveling with the travel speed
switch set to Hi or Mi, if the load
increases, such as when travelling uphill,
and the travel pressure goes above 32.3
MPa {330 kg/cm2} for more than 0.5 sec,
the travel motor capacity will automatically
change to low speed (equivalent to Lo).
(The travel speed switch will stay at Hi or
Mi.)
If the load decreases, such as when trav-
elling on level ground or travelling down-
hill, and the travel pressure goes below
18.6 MPa {190 kg/cm2} for more than 0.5
sec, the travel motor capacity will auto-
matically change and will return to Hi or
Mi.

10-600 28 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
Electronic control system SEN06271-00

8. Attachment flow control and circuit selector function (if equipped)

Function
q This function is available only with the attach-
ment specification.
q The function acts as follows according to the
flow command and working mode from the
monitor.
1) It throttles the attachment PPC pressure
and controls the flow when the pedal is
depressed fully.
2) In B mode and the other modes, it
switches to attachment single acting (B) or
double acting (other modes).

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 10-600 29


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
SEN06271-00 Electronic control system

9. System component parts


1) PPC oil pressure switch

1. Plug
2. Switch
3. Connector

Specifications
Type of contacts: Normally open contacts
Operating (ON) pressure:
0.5 ± 0.1 MPa {5.0 ± 1.0 kg/cm2}
Resetting (OFF) pressure:
0.3 ± 0.05 MPa {3.0 ± 0.5 kg/cm2}

Function
q This switch is installed to the Attachment PPC
valve (1 piece).
q This sensor detects the operating condition of
each actuator by the PPC pressure and trans-
mit it to the pump controller.

10-600 30 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
Electronic control system SEN06271-00

2) Oil pressure sensor

1. Sensor
2. Connector

Function q The relationship between the pressure applied


q The sensor is installed to the travel PPC valve to sensors (P) and output voltage (E) is shown
(4 pieces). in the figure below.
q It converts the pump discharge pressure into a
voltage and transmits it to the pump controller.

Operation
q The oil pressure is applied to the diaphragm of
the oil pressure sensor from the pressure
intake part, the diaphragm is deformed.
q The deformation in the diaphragm causes the
resistance of the gauge to change. This
causes a change in the output voltage, which
is transmitted to the amplifier (voltage ampli-
fier).

q The amplifier magnifies output voltage (E) and


transmits it to the pump controller.

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 10-600 31


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
SEN06271-00 Electronic control system

3) Pump pressure sensor (high pressure)

1. Sensor
2. Connector

Operation
q The relationship between the pressure applied
to sensors (P) and output voltage (E) is shown
in the figure below.

10-600 32 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
Electronic control system SEN06271-00

4) Pump controller

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 10-600 33


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
SEN06271-00 Electronic control system

CN-CP01
CN-CP01 Input/
Input/ Pin No. Signal name
Pin No. Signal name output
output 52 NC(*) —
1 PWR_IN_BATT Input 53 Boom raise pressure sensor Input
2 GND_PWR Input 54 Travel pressure sensor (near left) Input
3 Washer motor output 55 Travel pressure sensor (near right) Input
4 PWR_IN_BATT Input 56 Wiper limit switch (W) Input
5 GND_PWR Input 57 Window limit switch Input
6 NC(*) — 58 Machin select 4 Input
7 NC(*) — 59 NC(*) —
8 5V potentiometer power supply output 60 Key switch (C) Input
9 PWR_OUT_5V_0 output 61 NC(*) —
10 NC(*) Input 62 External starting signal Input
11 NC(*) — 63 NC(*) —
12 NC(*) — Input/
64 COMM_CAN_L_0
13 NC(*) — output
14 Boom out pressure sensor Input 65 NC(*) —
15 Arm out pressure sensor Input 66 NC(*) —
16 Swing pressure sensor R.H. Input 67 NC(*) —
17 Arm in pressure sensor Input 68 R pump pressure sensor Input
18 GND_SIG_A Input 69 NC(*) —
19 Swing lock switch Input 70 NC(*) —
20 NC(*) — 71 NC(*) Input
21 Machin select 2 Input 72 Swing pressure switch (right) Input
22 NC(*) — 73 Bucket curl pressure sensor Input
23 NC(*) — 74 NC(*) —
24 Key switch (ACC) Input 75 Wiper contacts (P) Input
25 NC(*) — 76 Swing pressure switch Input
26 NC(*) — 77 Machin select 3 Input
27 NC(*) — 78 NC(*) —
28 NC(*) — 79 Key switch (ACC) Input
29 Hydraulic–oil temperature Input 80 NC(*) —
30 NC(*) — 81 NC(*) —
31 NC(*) — *: Never connect to NC or malfunctions or failures will
32 NC(*) — occur.
33 NC(*) —
34 Bucket dump pressure sensor Input
35 Travel pressure sensor (near left) Input
36 Travel pressure sensor (near right) Input
37 GND_SIG_D —
38 Swing prolix switch Input
39 Machin select 5 Input
40 Machin select 1 Input
41 Knob switch Input
42 NC(*) —
43 Key switch (ACC) Input
44 NC(*) —
Input/
45 COMM_CAN_H_0
output
46 Analog signal GND Input
47 NC(*) —
48 NC(*) —
49 F pump pressure sensor Input
50 NC(*) —
51 NC(*) —

10-600 34 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
Electronic control system SEN06271-00

CN-C02
Input/
Pin No. Signal name
output
82 NC(*) —
83 NC(*) —
84 Variable back pressure solenoid valve output
85 NC(*) —
86 Att circuit change solenoid valve output
87 Travel speed solenoid valve output
88 NC(*) —
89 NC(*) —
90 NC(*) —
91 NC(*) —
92 NC(*) —
93 NC(*) —
94 NC(*) —
95 NC(*) output
96 PCQ–EPC (F) output
97 Att flux limit EPC output
98 NC(*) —
99 NC(*) —
100 NC(*) —
101 Swing brake solenoid valve output
102 NC(*) —
103 NC(*) —
104 NC(*) —
105 NC(*) —
106 NC(*) —
107 Travel alarm output
108 Battery relay output
109 2-stage relief solenoid valve output
110 Travel valve solenoid valve output
111 NC(*) —
112 Merge-divider solenoid valve (Main) output
113 NC(*) —
114 Wiper motor (–) output
115 GND_ACT Input
116 Solenoid power supply Input
117 GND_ACT Input
118 Solenoid power supply Input
119 Wiper motor (+) output
120 GND_ACT Input
121 Solenoid power supply Input
*: Never connect to NC or malfunctions or failures will
occur.

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 10-600 35


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
SEN06271-00 Machine monitor system

Machine monitor system 1

1. Machine monitor Function


2. Battery q The monitor system keeps the operator
3. Pump controller informed of all machine functions, by monitor-
4. Engine controller</p ing the machine conditions by using the sen-
5. Air conditioner controller sors and switches installed in various parts of
6. KOMTRAX terminal the machine and processing them instantly to
7. Sensors and switches display on the machine monitor.
8. Wiper motor and window washer motor</p The information displayed on the machine
9. Camera monitor falls into the following types:
1. Alarm when the machine has trouble
Input and output signals 2. Machine status display (coolant tempera-
a. Power supply ture, hydraulic oil temperature, fuel level,
b. CAN signal etc.)
c. Sensor and switch signals 3. Display of camera image </li>
d. Drive signal q The switches on the machine monitor have an
e. Camera signal operating function to control the machine.

10-600 36 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
Machine monitor system SEN06271-00

Machine monitor 1

Function q When the engine is started, the battery voltage


q <li>The machine monitor has monitor display may drop suddenly, depending on the ambient
function, mode selection function and switch temperature and the condition of the battery. In
function for electrical parts etc. Also it has an this case, the machine monitor display may go
alarm buzzer. off for a moment. However, this phenomenon
q The machine monitor has a CPU (Central Pro- is not a failure.
cessing Unit) in it to process, display, and out- q Continuous operation of the machine monitor
put the information. may display blue bright spots on the screen
q The machine monitor consists of a display and having a black background; it is quite normal.
switches: the display is of LCD type, and the Blue bright spots can never be a problem as
switches are of flat sheet switch. the screen has usually blue or white back-
q If a failure occurs in the machine monitor itself, ground. (White in the LCD is made up of red,
controller or wiring circuit between monitor and green and blue.)
controller, the monitor does not display prop-
erly.

Precautions on the machine monitor display


q <li>One of the features of liquid crystal display
panels is that there may be black spots (spots
that do not light up) or white spots (spots that
stay lit up) on the screen. If there are fewer
than 10 black or white spots, this is not a fail-
ure or a defect. Products having 10 or less
black or bright spots conform the product spec-
ification; such the condition is quite normal.

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 10-600 37


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
SEN06271-00 Machine monitor system

Input and output signals


070-18P [CN-CM01]
Pin No. Signal name Input/Output signal
1 Continuous power supply (24 V) Input
2 Continuous power supply (24 V) Input
3 GND (continuous power supply) —
4 GND (continuous power supply) —
5 External start signal Input
6 Starting motor cut-off relay (for personal code) Output
7 NC (*) —
8 System operating lamp Input/Output
9 Lamp switch Input
10 Starting switch (ACC) Input
11 Starting switch (C) Input
12 Preheating Input
13 Engine shutdown secondary switch Input
14 GND (body signal) —
15 Fuel level sensor Input
16 Charge level (Alternator R terminal) Input
17 NC (*) —
18 NC (*) —

*: Never connect these pins. Malfunctions or failures may occur.

070-12P [CN-CM02]
Pin No. Signal name Input/Output signal
1 NC (*) —
2 Engine oil level sensor Input
3 Radiator coolant level sensor Input
4 Air cleaner clogging sensor Input
5 Swing lock switch Input
6 NC (*) —
7 CAN (C) terminating resistor terminal —
8 CAN (C)_H Input/Output
9 CAN (C)_L Input/Output
10 NC (*) —
11 NC (*) —
12 NC (*) —

*: Never connect these pins. Malfunctions or failures may occur.

070-20P [CN-CM03]
Pin No. Signal name Input/Output signal
1 NC (*) —
2 NC (*) —
3 NC (*) —
4 NC (*) —
5 NC (*) —
6 NC (*) —
7 NC (*) —
8 NC (*) —

10-600 38 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
Machine monitor system SEN06271-00

070-20P [CN-CM03]
Pin No. Signal name Input/Output signal
9 NC (*) —
10 NC (*) —
11 NC (*) —
12 NC (*) —
13 NC (*) —
14 NC (*) —
15 NC (*) —
16 NC (*) —
17 NC (*) —
18 NC (*) —
19 NC (*) —
20 NC (*) —

*: Never connect these pins. Malfunctions or failures may occur.

070-8P [CN-CM04]
Pin No. Signal name Input/Output signal
1 Camera power supply (8 V) Output
2 Camera NTSC signal 1 Input
3 Camera NTSC signal 2 Input
4 Camera NTSC signal 3 Input
5 GND (Camera power supply) —
6 Switching camera 2 to original/mirror image Output
7 Switching camera 3 to original/mirror image Output
8 Shield GND —

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 10-600 39


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
SEN06271-00 Machine monitor system

Display 1

A: Standard screen 7. Auto-deceleration monitor


B: Check before starting screen 8. Working mode monitor
C: Maintenance interval warning screen 9. Travel speed monitor
D: Warning screen 10. Fuel level gauge
E: Guidance screen 11. Fuel level monitor
F: Camera image screen 12. Eco gauge
a Camera image screen (F) shown in the figure 13. Fuel consumption gauge
is when two or more cameras are installed 14. Hydraulic oil temperature monitor
15. Hydraulic oil temperature gauge
1. Message monitor 16. Engine coolant temperature monitor
2. Air conditioner monitor 17. Engine coolant temperature gauge
3. Wiper monitor 18. Radiator coolant level monitor
4. Swing lock monitor 19. Charge level monitor
5. Engine preheating monitor 20. Engine oil pressure monitor
6. Service meter 21. Engine oil level monitor

10-600 40 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
Machine monitor system SEN06271-00

22. Air cleaner clogging monitor


23. Water separator monitor
24. Clock
25. Maintenance interval warning monitor
26. System status monitor
27. Action level monitor
28. ECO guidance

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 10-600 41


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
SEN06271-00 Machine monitor system

Gauge

Gauge Display item Description Remarks


Temperature Background
Range
(°C) color
• Indicates corresponding
W1 105 Red temperature range.
(*1)
W2 102 Red • Alarm buzzer sounds when the
Engine coolant
temperature is 105°C or higher.
temperature W3 100 Blue
• If the monitor background
gauge W4 85 Blue appears white, warm-up the
W5 60 Blue engine.
W6 30 White
Temperature Background
Range
(°C) color
• Indicates corresponding
H1 105 Red temperature range.
(*1)
H2 102 Red • Alarm buzzer sounds when the
Hydraulic oil
temperature is 105°C or higher.
temperature H3 100 Blue
• If the monitor background
gauge H4 85 Blue appears white, warm up the
H5 40 Blue hydraulic components.
H6 20 White
Background
Range Quantity (l)
color
F1 417 Blue
(*1) F2 347.3 Blue • Indicates corresponding
Fuel level
F3 277.3 Blue remaining fuel level.
gauge
F4 138.8 Blue
F5 99.9 Blue
F6 61.8 Red
Segment Load level • Indicates instantaneous fuel
Light to consumption (average of fuel
Green 1 to 8 consumption per 3 minutes) in 10
medium
(*2) steps.
Eco gauge (It is displayed when the user
Orange 9, 10 Heavy menu’s “ECO guidance” o
Display setting o “Eco gauge
display” is set.)
• Indicates accumulated engine
operating hours (the alternator is
Service meter 00000.0 h - 99999.9 h running).
(F4 switch changes it to clock
display.)

• Displays time.
• 12-hour display (AM/PM)
Clock (F4 switch changes it to service
• 24-hour display
meter display.)

• Indicates average fuel


(*2) consumption.
• 1 day
Fuel (Display is switched when the
• Split
consumption user menu’s “ECO guidance” o
• Not installed
gauge “Display setting” o “Fuel gauge
display” are specified.)

*1: If the gauge signal is not available due to open circuit in CAN communication line, the gauge pointer dis-
appears.
*2: Display item is switched when the user menu’s “ECO guidance” o “Display setting” are specified.

10-600 42 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
Machine monitor system SEN06271-00

Caution monitor

Description

Symbol Display item Monitor display Remarks


Action level
Range (Background
monitor
color)
Min. 102°C Lights up (Red) L02 • Background color changes
Min. 30°C or Lights up depending on the
— temperature detected.
below 102°C (Blue)
(*1) • Alarm buzzer sounds when
Engine coolant the temperature is 105°C or
temperature Lights up higher.
Below 30°C — • If the monitor background
(White)
appears white, warm-up the
engine.
Min. 102°C Lights up (Red) L02 • Background color changes
Min. 20°C or Lights up depending on the
— temperature detected.
below 102°C (Blue)
(*1) • Alarm buzzer sounds when
Hydraulic oil the temperature is 105°C or
temperature Lights up higher.
Below 20°C — • If the monitor background
(White)
appears white, warm up the
hydraulic components.
Below 62 l Lights up (Red) —
• Background color changes
(*1)
Lights up depending on the remaining
Fuel level Min. 62 l —
(Blue) fuel level.

When
abnormal Lights up (*3) • When failure is detected with
(*1)
(When below (Yellow) L01 the engine stopped, the
Radiator coolant
specified level) monitor lights up on the
level
screen.
When normal Lights out —
When charge
is defective • The monitor lights up on the
(*1) (Charge screen and alarm buzzer
Lights up (Red) L03
Battery charge voltage < sounds when failure is
condition battery detected while the engine
voltage) running.
When normal Lights out —
When • The monitor lights up on the
(*1) abnormal screen and alarm buzzer
Lights up (Red) L03
Engine oil (When below sounds when failure is
pressure specified level) detected while the engine
When normal Lights out — running.
When
abnormal Lights up (*3) • When failure is detected with
(*1) (When below (Yellow) L01 the engine stopped, the
Eng. oil level specified level) monitor lights up on the
screen.
When normal Lights out —
When
abnormal Lights up (*3) • When failure is detected with
(*1)
(When above (Yellow) L01 the engine running, the
Clogging of air
specified level) monitor lights up on the
cleaner
screen.
When normal Lights out —

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 10-600 43


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
SEN06271-00 Machine monitor system

Description

Symbol Display item Monitor display Remarks


Action level
Range (Background
monitor
color)
When
abnormal
(There is water • When failure is detected with
(*1) collected Lights up (Red) — the engine running, the
Water separator above the monitor lights up on the
specified screen.
amount.)
When normal Lights out —
When • The display changes
exceeding depending on the time to/
Lights up (Red) —
maintenance after the maintenance.
interval • After the starting switch is
Maintenance
(*2) turned to ON position , the
interval warning
When monitor turns on if the
Lights up monitor light-up conditions
exceeding —
(Yellow) are met, and then goes out in
maintenance
notifying time 30 seconds.
When action
level “L04” or • When failure is detected in
Lights up (Red) L04 and L03 the machine system, the
“L03” is
detected monitor lights up.
System status
• When the background color
When action is red, the alarm buzzer
Lights up (*3)
level “L01” is sounds.
(Yellow) L01
detected
When action
level “L04” or • When failure is detected in
Lights up (Red) L04 and L03 the engine system, the
“L03” is
State of engine detected monitor lights up.
system • When the background color
When action is red, the alarm buzzer
Lights up (*3)
level “L01” is sounds.
(Yellow) L01
detected
When action
level “L04” or • When failure is detected in
Lights up (Red) L04 and L03 the hydraulic system, the
“L03” is
State of hydraulic detected monitor lights up.
system • When the background color
When action is red, the alarm buzzer
Lights up (*3)
level “L01” is sounds.
(Yellow) L01
detected

• The monitor lights up and


Engine
Engine alarm buzzer sounds when
overspeed is Lights up (Red) L02
overspeed engine overspeed is
detected
detected.

Sate of air When air • When failure is detected in


Lights up
conditioner conditioner is (*3) L01 the air conditioner system,
(Yellow)
system abnormal the monitor lights up.

10-600 44 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
Machine monitor system SEN06271-00

Description

Symbol Display item Monitor display Remarks


Action level
Range (Background
monitor
color)
When action
level “L04” is Lights up (Red) L04
detected
When action • When failure is detected on
level “L03” is Lights up (Red) L03 the machine, the monitor
detected lights up.
Action level
When action When the background color
level “L02” is Lights up (Red) L02 is red, the alarm buzzer
detected sounds.
When action
Lights up (*3)
level “L01” is
(Yellow) L01
detected

*1: It is included in the check before starting items. After the staring switch is turned to “ON” position, the
monitor turns on for two seconds, and changes to the standard screen if no failure is found.
*2: The notifying time is changeable from the items in “Maintenance mode display setting” of the service
mode.
*3: Monitor goes out after lighting up for 2 seconds.

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 10-600 45


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
SEN06271-00 Machine monitor system

Pilot monitor

Symbol Display item Description Remarks


• It operates automatically at a
low temperature.
Automatic (Symbol lights up as long as
preheating for approx. 30 seconds)
• It goes off after the engine is
started.
Elapsed time
after turning • Indicates preheat operating
Preheating the starting
Monitor display status.
switch to
“HEAT
Manual
(Preheating)”
preheating
0 to 30 sec. Lights up
30 to 40 sec. Flashes
After 40 sec.
Lights out
or longer
One-touch
power max. Monitor display
switch • Indicates the operating status
One-touch power
Lights up of one-touch power
max.
ON (Goes out if pressed for 8.5 maximizing function.
seconds)
OFF Lights out
Swing lock Swing brake
Monitor display
switch cancel switch
OFF OFF Lights out • Indicates swing lock
Swing lock
ON OFF Lights up operating status.
OFF ON Flashes
ON ON Flashes

INT: Intermittent operation


• Indicates front glass wiper
Wiper ON: Continuous operation
operating condition.
Lights out: Holds in position

Lights up: ON • Indicates air conditioner and


Air conditioner
Lights out: OFF air blower operating status.

Message Lights up: There is unread message. • State of the message is


(Unread) Lights out: No message displayed.

Message
(No return Lights up: There is an already-read message
• State of the message is
message, but return message for it is not sent yet.
displayed.
already-read Lights out: No message
message)

Lights up: ON • Indicates auto-decelerator


Auto-deceleration
Lights out: OFF operating status.

10-600 46 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
Machine monitor system SEN06271-00

Symbol Display item Description Remarks


P: Heavy-duty operation
E: Low-fuel consumption operation
L: Fine operation
Working mode B: Breaker operation • Displays working mode.
ATT-P: Double-acting attachment operation
ATT-E: Double-acting attachment and low-fuel
consumption operation

Lo: Low speed


Travel speed Mi: Middle speed • Displays travel speed setting.
Hi: High speed

Idle stop guidance


Guidance on deterrence of hydraulic relief • Guidance for supporting the
ECO guidance E-mode recommendation guidance machine operation and
Travel partial recommendation guidance control are displayed.
Low oil level guidance

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 10-600 47


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
SEN06271-00 Machine monitor system

Switches 1

No. Name Function Operation


Switches the auto-deceleration
Auto-deceleration • When working mode is “L”, this switch is always
function ON/OFF.
1 switch “OFF” after engine started.
Lights up: ON
[Numeric keypad: 1] OFF io ON
Lights out: OFF
P: Heavy-duty operation
E: Low-fuel operation
(*1)
L: Fine operation
Working mode Displays the working mode
2 B: Breaker operation
selector switch selector screen.
ATT-P: Double-acting attachment operation
[Numeric keypad: 2]
ATT-E: Double-acting attachment and low-fuel
operation
Changes the travel speed.
Travel speed selector • Speed is sequentially changed as shown below.
Lo lights up: Low speed
3 switch • Lo (Low speed) o Mi (Medium speed) o Hi (High
Mi lights up: Medium speed
[Numeric keypad: 3] speed) o Lo (Low speed)
Hi lights up: High speed
Stops the alarm buzzer.
• The alarm buzzer stops sounding.
Buzzer cancel switch (Some alarm buzzer does not
4 • The alarm buzzer sounds again if another error
[Numeric keypad: 4] stop sounding even if the switch is
worth alarming is detected.
pressed.)
Operates the front glass wiper. • Pressing the switch sequentially changes the
(*2)
INT: Intermittent operation wiper operation.
5 Wiper switch
ON: Continuous operation OFF (Stop) o INT (Intermittent) o ON
[Numeric keypad: 5]
Lights out: Holds in position (Continuous) o OFF (Stop)

10-600 48 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
Machine monitor system SEN06271-00

No. Name Function Operation


ON: Washer fluid is sprayed and windshield wiper
works continuously.
[When wiper stops]
(*2)
OFF: Windshield wiper works twice continuously
Window washer Sprays washer fluid onto the front
6 and stops after the switch is released.
switch [Numeric window glass.
[When wiper operates intermittently]
keypad: 6]
OFF: Windshield wiper works twice continuously
and returns to intermittent operation after the switch
is released.
Fan switch (increase) Controls the air flow of the air • The air flow increases immediately after the air
7a
[Numeric keypad: 7] conditioner in 6 levels. conditioner adjustment screen appears.
(Low, Medium 1, Medium 2, • The air flow decreases immediately after the air
7b Fan switch (decrease) Medium 3, Medium 4 and High)
conditioner adjustment screen appears.
Temperature control • The preset temperature increases immediately
8a switch (raise) Controls the temperature inside after the air conditioner adjustment screen
[Numeric keypad: 8] the cab. appears.
Temperature control (18.0°C to 32.0°C: Setting is • The preset temperature decreases immediately
8b switch (lower) available in 0.5°C steps) after the air conditioner adjustment screen
[Numeric keypad: 0] appears.
• The air flow, combination of vents, and selection
Operates the air conditioner and
(*3) of FRESH/RECIRC air are automatically selected
air flow with automatic operation.
9 Auto switch according to the set temperature immediately
AUTO lights up: Automatic
[Numeric keypad: 9] after the air conditioner adjustment screen
operation
appears.
Selects the air conditioner ON/
• Switches to the air conditioner adjustment
(*4) OFF.
10 screen, and pressing it again switches ON/OFF.
Air conditioner switch A/C ON lighted: Manual operation
OFF io ON
Not lighting: Stop
• Switches to the air conditioner adjustment
FRESH/RECIRC air screen, and pressing it again switches FRESH/
11 Changes the FRESH/RECIRC.
changeover switch RECIRC.
RECIRC io FRESH
Selects the air vent mode from 6
modes.
1. Front vent • Switches to the air conditioner adjustment
2. Front and rear vents screen, and pressing it again switches air vent
12 Vent selector switch
3. Front, rear and foot vents mode.
4. Foot vent 1o2o3o4o5o6o1
5. Foot and defroster vents
6. Defroster vent
Stops the fan and air conditioner.
13 OFF switch • The fan and air conditioner stop.
Lights OFF: OFF
14a Guidance icon
a See Guidance icon and function switch
14b Function switch

*1: When the working mode is changed, the auto-deceleration function is turned ON. But, when L mode is
selected, it is turned OFF.
*2: When the front window is open, the wiper and washer do not operate even if the switch is pressed.
*3: If temperature is set to 18.0°C or 32.0°C, the air flow from the fan is always set to “High” and does not
change even if the set temperature is reached.
*4: Air conditioner cannot be operated while the fan stops.“

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 10-600 49


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
SEN06271-00 Machine monitor system

Guidance icon and function switch


q Functions available with the function switch vary depending on the guidance icon displayed above the
switch.
q No function is available if no guidance icon appears above the function switch.
q The following is the list of guidance icons and the functions displayed above the function switches.

Guidance icon Item Function


Selects user menu screen.
Background colors allow confirming the type of information transmitted.
Selection of user mode • Gray: When the condition is normal
screen • Red: When exceeding maintenance interval warning
• Yellow: When exceeding maintenance interval warning
• Green: When there is unread KOMTRAX message

Switching clock/service
Switches clock/service meter display.
meter

Switching to camera screen Switches to camera image display screen.

Enters selected/setting item.


Background colors allow confirming the type of information transmitted.
Enter
• Gray: When the condition is normal
• Green: When energy saving guidance is displayed

Return Returns to the previous screen or status.

Selects the item right above the current item


Switching the select item
(To the bottom item from the top item.)

Selects the item right below the current item


Switching the select item
(To the top item from the bottom item.)

Green arrow: Selects the item on the right side of the tab.
Switching the select item White arrow: Selects the item on the right side of the current item.
(To the leftmost item from the rightmost item.)

Green arrow: Selects the item on the left side of the tab.
Switching the select item White arrow: Selects the item on the left side of the current item.
(To the rightmost item from the leftmost item.)

Selects the page right above the current page.


Switching the select item
(To the bottom page from the top page.)

10-600 50 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
Machine monitor system SEN06271-00

Guidance icon Item Function

Selects the page right below the current page.


Switching the select item
(To the top page from the bottom page.)

Clear Clears selected/displayed item.

Sets selected item back to default.


Restores default value
(Used for screen adjustment.)

Set Performs setting.

Starts function.
Start (Used for starting measurement of split fuel consumption on the fuel
consumption display screen.)

Stops operation.
Stop (Used for stopping measurement of split fuel consumption on fuel
consumption display screen.)

Saving Saves setting

Switching to the name


Switches the current screen to the name setting screen
setting screen

Switching to ATT1 oil flow Switching the current screen to attachment 1 oil flow setting screen.
setting screen (Enabled only when attachments 1 and 2 are equipped)

Switching to ATT2 oil flow Switching the current screen to attachment 2 oil flow setting screen.
setting screen (Enabled only when attachments 1 and 2 are equipped)

Holds the value of the target item of monitoring.


HOLD
(Used when monitoring is turned on)

Resets the currently held value of the target item of monitoring.


Resetting the hold
(Used when monitoring is turned on)

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 10-600 51


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
SEN06271-00 Machine monitor system

Guidance icon Item Function

Switching the fuel


Switches the graphs on the fuel consumption record screen.
consumption record screen

Switching to oil flow setting


Switches to the attachment and breaker oil flow setting screen.
screen

Switches to the currently occurring failures list screen.


Switching to the currently Background colors allow confirming the type of information transmitted.
occurring failures list screen • Red: When an action level of L2, L3 or L4 is displayed
• Yellow: When the action level of L1 is displayed

Display No. 1 camera


Selects No. 1 camera image display screen.
screen

Display No. 2 camera


Selects No. 2 camera image display screen.
screen

Display No. 1 and No. 2


Display both images of No. 1 and No. 2 cameras simultaneously.
camera screens

10-600 52 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
Machine monitor system SEN06271-00

Operator mode function


q The operator can select the information to be displayed usually on the screen and the function to be
used by operating the switches.
Display and setting of some functions require special operation of the switch.
q Items available in the operator mode are as follows:

Category Display order (*2)


Item
(*1) V W X Y Z
KOMATSU logo screen 1 1 1 1 1
Password input screen 2 — — — —
Breaker mode check screen — — 2 — —
Checks before starting screen 3 2 3 2 2
A Warning screen after check before starting — — — 3 —
Overdue maintenance time item screen — — — — 3
Working mode and travel speed check screen 4 3 4 4 4
Standard screen 5 4 5 5 5
End screen
Selecting auto-deceleration function
Selecting working mode
Selecting travel speed
Stopping alarm buzzer
Operating windshield wiper
Operating window washer
Operating air conditioner
B Operating camera mode display
Switching between clock display and service meter display
Checking maintenance information
Setting and displaying user menu
• ECO Guidance
• Machine Setting
• Maintenance
• Monitor Setting
• Message display (including KOMTRAX messages for user)
Displaying ECO guidance
C Displaying caution monitor
Displaying action level and failure code
LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) display condition checking function
D Service meter reading checking function
Access restriction setting/password changing function

*1: The items available in the operator mode are categorized as shown below.
A: Displays that appear since starting switch is turned to “ON” position until the standard screen appears,
and the displays that appear after starting switch is turned to “OFF” position .
B: Displays that appear when the switch on the machine monitor is operated.
C: Displays when a certain condition is satisfied
D: Displays that require special switch operations.
*2: Display sequence from “ON” of starting switch to the standard screen varies depending on the settings
and conditions of the machine as follows:
V: When engine start lock is set effective
W: When engine start lock is disabled
X: When working mode at start is set to “Breaker Mode (B)”.

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 10-600 53


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
SEN06271-00 Machine monitor system

Y: When a failure is detected during check before starting.


Z: When a maintenance time overdue is detected for an item.
a For how to operate the operator mode functions, see the Operation and Maintenance Manual or “Oper-
ator mode (Outline)” section in Testing and adjusting.
a For how to set the engine start lock on/off, see “Password setting/cancel manual”.

10-600 54 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
Machine monitor system SEN06271-00

Service mode function


q The functions in this mode are not displayed usually on the screen. Information display and various set-
tings can be made only by the technician through the special operation of the switches.
This mode is used for special setting, testing, adjusting, or troubleshooting.
q Items available in the service mode are as follows:

Monitoring / Pre-defined
Monitoring / Custom
Mechanical Systems
Abnormality Record
Electrical Systems
Maintenance Record
Maintenance Mode Setting
Phone Number Entry
Key-on Mode
Unit
Default
With/Without Attachment
Camera
Diagnostic Tests Cylinder Cut-out
Pump Absorption Torque (F)
Pump Absorption Torque (R)
Adjustment
Low Speed
Attachment Flow Adjustment
No Injection
Terminal Status
KOMTRAX Settings GPS & Communication Status
Modem Status
Service Message

a For how to operate the service mode functions, see “section in Testing and adjusting”.

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 10-600 55


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
SEN06271-00 Sensor

Sensor 1
q The signals from the sensors are input to the
monitor panel directly.
q Either side of a sensor of contact type is
always connected to the chassis ground.
Type of When When
Sensor name
sensor normal abnormal
ON OFF
Hydraulic oil level Contact
(Closed) (Open)
Hydraulic oil Resis-
– –
temperature tance
Resis-
Fuel level – –
tance
ON OFF
Air cleaner clogging Contact
(Closed) (Open)
ON OFF
Coolant temperature Contact
(Closed) (Open)

Hydraulic oil level sensor

1. Connector
2. Bracket
3. Float
4. Switch

10-600 56 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
Sensor SEN06271-00

Hydraulic oil temperature sensor 1

1. Thermistor 4. Tube
2. Body 5. Wire
3. Tube 6. Connector

Fuel level sensor 1

1. Float 3. Cover
2. Connector 4. Variable resistor

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 10-600 57


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
SEN06271-00 Sensor

Air cleaner clogging sensor 1

Coolant level sensor 1

1. Sub tank 3. Sensor


2. Float 4. Connector

10-600 58 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
KOMTRAX system SEN06271-00

KOMTRAX system 1

q The KOMTRAX system consists of the KOMTRAX terminal, communication antenna and GPS antenna.
q This system transmits various machine information by use of the radio communication. This system
allows the KOMTRAX operator to refer the information and provide various services to the customers.
q Information transmittable from the KOMTRAX system are as follows.
1. Location information
2. Operation information (service meter, odometer, etc.)
3. Alarm and failure information
4. Fuel consumption information
5. Maintenance information
6. Machine usage history information

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 10-600 59


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
SEN06271-00 KOMTRAX system

KOMTRAX terminal
Type: TC330
a To provide the services, you need to make an arrangement for starting the KOMTRAX service sepa-
rately.

1. LED lamp display


2. GPS antenna connection
3. Machine harness connection (070-18P)
4. Machine harness connection (070-12P)
5. Communication antenna connection

10-600 60 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
KOMTRAX system SEN06271-00

Input and output signals


070-18P[CN-CK01]

Pin No. Signal name Input/Output signal


1 NC (*1) —
2 NC (*1) —
3 NC (*1) —
4 NC (*1) —
5 NC (*1) —
6 NC (*1) —
7 NC (*1) —
8 NC (*1) —
9 NC (*1) —
10 CAN (C)_H Input/Output
11 CAN (C)_L Input/Output
12 NC (*1) —
13 NC (*1) —
14 External start signal Input/Output
15 NC (*1) —
16 NC (*1) —
17 NC (*1) —
18 NC (*1) —

*1: Never connect these pins. Malfunctions or failures may occur.

070-12P [CN-CK02]

Pin No. Signal name Input/Output signal


1 GND —
2 GND —
3 Starting switch (ACC) Input
4 Alternator (R) Input
5 NC (*1) —
6 Power supply Input
7 Power supply Input
8 NC (*1) —
9 NC (*1) —
10 NC (*1) —
11 Starting switch (C) Input
12 NC (*1) —

*1: Never connect these pins. Malfunctions or failures may occur.

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 10-600 61


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
SEN06271-00 KOMTRAX system

Function
q This terminal uses the satellite communications technology.
q The terminal is an equipment which transmits various machine information obtained through network
signals and input signals, as well as GPS positioning data. The terminal can transmit data via the com-
munication antenna.
q The status of the terminal can be checked by using the menu of “KOMTRAX setting” in the service
mode of the machine monitor .
q Use of KOMTRAX terminal must be limited for the countries in which such communication is allowed.
q This terminal has LED lamps and 7-segment lamp indicator used for testing and troubleshooting on its
display section.

a When changing the country where the system is used, you must give notice to Komatsu Ltd. the infor-
mation which country the system is used in advance.
a When using the KOMTRAX system in Japan, the terminal special to Japan must be mounted.

10-600 62 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
KOMTRAX system SEN06271-00

KOMTRAX terminal
Type: TC530

1. LED lamp display 4. Machine harness connection (070-12P)


2. GPS antenna connection 5. Communication antenna connection
3. Machine harness connection (070-18P)

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 10-600 63


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
SEN06271-00 KOMTRAX system

Input and output signals


070-18P[CN-CK01]

Pin No. Signal name Input/Output signal


1 NC (*1) —
2 NC (*1) —
3 NC (*1) —
4 NC (*1) —
5 NC (*1) —
6 NC (*1) —
7 NC (*1) —
8 NC (*1) —
9 NC (*1) —
10 CAN (C)_H Input/Output
11 CAN (C)_L Input/Output
12 NC (*1) —
13 NC (*1) —
14 External start signal Input/Output
15 NC (*1) —
16 NC (*1) —
17 NC (*1) —
18 NC (*1) —

*1: Never connect these pins. Malfunctions or failures may occur.

070-12P [CN-CK02]

Pin No. Signal name Input/Output signal


1 GND —
2 GND —
3 Starting switch (ACC) Input
4 Alternator (R) Input
5 NC (*1) —
6 Power supply Input
7 Power supply Input
8 NC (*1) —
9 NC (*1) —
10 NC (*1) —
11 Starting switch (C) Input
12 NC (*1) —

*1: Never connect these pins. Malfunctions or failures may occur.

10-600 64 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
KOMTRAX system SEN06271-00

Function
q This terminal uses the ground wave communications technology.
q The terminal is an equipment which transmits various machine information obtained through network
signals and input signals, as well as GPS positioning data. The terminal can transmit data via the com-
munication antenna.
q The status of the terminal can be checked by using the menu of “KOMTRAX setting” in the service
mode of the machine monitor .
q Use of KOMTRAX terminal must be limited for the countries in which such communication is allowed.
q This terminal has LED lamps and 7-segment lamp indicator used for testing and troubleshooting on its
display section.

a This terminal is only for other than Japan and cannot be used in Japan.

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 10-600 65


SEN06271-00

PC300-8M0, PC300LC-8M0, PC350-8M0, PC350LC-8M0 HYDRAULIC EXCAVATOR

Form No. SEN06271-00

© 2013 KOMATSU
All Rights Reserved
Printed in Japan 01-13 (01)

10-600 66
SEN06273-00

HYDRAULIC EXCAVATOR 1SHOP MANUAL

PC300-8M0
PC300LC-8M0
PC350-8M0
PC350LC-8M0

Machine model Serial number


PC300-8M0 80001 and up
PC300LC-8M0 80001 and up
PC350-8M0 80001 and up
PC350LC-8M0 80001 and up

90 Diagrams and drawings 1


100 Hydraulic diagrams and drawings
Symbols in hydraulic circuit diagram............................................................................................................... 2
Hydraulic circuit diagram................................................................................................................................. 5

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 90-100 1


SEN06273-00 90 Diagrams and drawings

Symbols in hydraulic circuit diagram 1

90-100 2 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


90 Diagrams and drawings SEN06273-00

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 90-100 3


SEN06273-00 90 Diagrams and drawings

90-100 4 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


Hydraulic circuit diagram
Hydraulic circuit diagram 1 PC300-8M0, PC300LC-8M0, PC350-8M0, PC350LC-8M0
PC300-8M0, PC300LC-8M0, PC350-8M0, PC350LC-8M0
a This figure covers the equipment and devices that are unavailable as optional items in some areas.

SEN06273-00
PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 90-100 5
90 Diagrams and drawings SEN06273-00

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 90-100 7


SEN06273-00

PC300-8M0, PC300LC-8M0, PC350-8M0, PC350LC-8M0 HYDRAULIC EXCAVATOR

Form No. SEN06273-00

© 2013 KOMATSU
All Rights Reserved
Printed in Japan 01-13 (01)

90-100 8
SEN06274-00

HYDRAULIC EXCAVATOR 1SHOP MANUAL

PC300-8M0
PC300LC-8M0
PC350-8M0
PC350LC-8M0

Machine model Serial number


PC300-8M0 80001 and up
PC300LC-8M0 80001 and up
PC350-8M0 80001 and up
PC350LC-8M0 80001 and up

90 Diagrams and drawings 1


200 Electrical diagrams and drawings
Symbols in electric circuit diagram.................................................................................................................. 2
Electrical circuit diagram ................................................................................................................................. 5

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 90-200 1


SEN06274-00 90 Diagrams and drawings

Symbols in electric circuit diagram 1

90-200 2 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


90 Diagrams and drawings SEN06274-00

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 90-200 3


SEN06274-00 90 Diagrams and drawings

90-200 4 PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0


Electrical circuit diagram (1/5)
Electrical circuit diagram (1/5) PC300-8M0, PC300LC-8M0, PC350-8M0, PC350LC-8M0
PC300-8M0, PC300LC-8M0, PC350-8M0, PC350LC-8M0
a This figure covers the equipment and devices that are unavailable as optional items in some areas.

SEN06274-00
PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 90-200 5
Electrical circuit diagram (2/5)
Electrical circuit diagram (2/5) PC300-8M0, PC300LC-8M0, PC350-8M0, PC350LC-8M0
PC300-8M0, PC300LC-8M0, PC350-8M0, PC350LC-8M0
a This figure covers the equipment and devices that are unavailable as optional items in some areas.

SEN06274-00
PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 90-200 7
Electrical circuit diagram (3/5)
Electrical circuit diagram (3/5) PC300-8M0, PC300LC-8M0, PC350-8M0, PC350LC-8M0
PC300-8M0, PC300LC-8M0, PC350-8M0, PC350LC-8M0
a This figure covers the equipment and devices that are unavailable as optional items in some areas.

SEN06274-00
PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 90-200 9
Electrical circuit diagram (4/5)
Electrical circuit diagram (4/5) PC300-8M0, PC300LC-8M0, PC350-8M0, PC350LC-8M0
PC300-8M0, PC300LC-8M0, PC350-8M0, PC350LC-8M0
a This figure covers the equipment and devices that are unavailable as optional items in some areas.

SEN06274-00
PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 90-200 11
Electrical circuit diagram (5/5)
Electrical circuit diagram (5/5) PC300-8M0, PC300LC-8M0, PC350-8M0, PC350LC-8M0
PC300-8M0, PC300LC-8M0, PC350-8M0, PC350LC-8M0
a This figure covers the equipment and devices that are unavailable as optional items in some areas.

SEN06274-00
PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 90-200 13
90 Diagrams and drawings SEN06274-00

PC300, 300LC, 350, 350LC-8M0 90-200 15


SEN06274-00

PC300-8M0, PC300LC-8M0, PC350-8M0, PC350LC-8M0 HYDRAULIC EXCAVATOR

Form No. SEN06274-00

© 2013 KOMATSU
All Rights Reserved
Printed in Japan 01-13 (01)

90-200 16

You might also like